Easily na - Routledge


Easily na - Routledge


Security, Strategic

and Military Studies

New Titles and Key Backlist 2010/11



Welcome to Routledge

Security, Strategic and Military Studies

New Titles and Key Backlist 2010/11

Page 2 Page 5 Page 6 Page 33 Page 35 Page 38 Page 40 Page 55


Key Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Critical Security Studies ..............6

International Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Foreign Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Regional Security: Asia . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Regional Security: Europe ...........26

Regional Security: Middle East & Africa ...27

Regional Security: Russia and Eastern

Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Conflict Resolution ................32

Peace and Conflict Studies . . . . . . . . . . 34

Media, War and Security ............40

Human Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Responsibility to Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . 41


uk and ReSt of woRld


Michael King – Marketing Executive

Email: michael.king@tandf.co.uk


Andrew Humphrys – Senior Commissioning Editor

Email: andrew.humphrys@tandf.co.uk

Rebecca Brennan – Senior Editorial Assistant

Email: rebecca.brennan@tandf.co.uk


Online: www.informaworld.com/journals

Email: tf.enquiries@informa.com

Call: +44 (0)20 7017 5544

Genocide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Terrorism Studies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Strategic Studies ..................50

Intelligence Studies ................52

Energy Security ...................54

Gender and Security ...............55

Military Studies ...................56

Cold War Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Reference .......................60

Routledge Paperbacks Direct .........61

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

uS, canada and latin aMeRica


Jessica Plummer – Marketing Assistant

Email: jessica.plummer@taylorandfrancis.com


Michael Kerns – Editor

Email: michael.kerns@taylorandfrancis.com

Mary Altman – Editorial Assistant

Email: mary.altman@taylorandfrancis.com


Online: www.informaworld.com/journals

Email: customerservice@taylorandfrancis.com

Call: Toll Free: 1-800-354-1420

Overseas: 1-215-625-8900

conSideRing bookS

foR couRSe uSe?

Books marked with are available as

complimentary exam copies for lecturers

or faculty considering them for course

adoption. To obtain your copy visit the URL

listed beneath the title in the catalog and

select your choice of print or electronic

copy. Visit www.routledge.com or in the

US you can call 1-800-634-7064.

Books marked with are available

as electronic inspection copies only.

The Easy Way to Order

Ordering online is fast and efficient, simply

follow the on-screen instructions. Alternatively,

you can call, fax, or see order form at the back

of this catalog.

UK and Rest of World

Call: +44 (0)1235 400524

Fax: +44 (0)20 7017 6699

US, Canada and Latin America

Call: 1-800-634-7064

Fax: 1-800-248-4724


Over 20,000 of our titles are available as eBooks

– available to browse at:



Register your email address at

www.tandf.co.uk/eupdates to receive

information on books, journals and other news

within your area of interest.

Trade Customers’ Representatives,

Agents and Distribution

For a complete list, visit:


Key TiTles

The Routledge Handbook

of Security Studies

Edited by Victor Mauer and Myriam Dunn

Cavelty, both at Swiss Federal Institute of

Technology (ETH), Zurich, Switzerland

Focusing on contemporary

challenges, this major new

Handbook offers a wideranging

collection of

cutting-edge essays from

leading scholars in the field of

Security Studies.

Selected Contents:

Part 1: Theoretical Approaches

to Security and Different

’Securities’ 1. Realism and

Security Studies 2. Liberalism

3. The English School and International Security 4. Critical

Security Studies 5. Constructivism and Securitization Studies

6. Poststructuralism, Continental Philosophy, and the

Remaking of Security Studies 7. Feminist Security Studies

8. National Security, Culture, and Identity 9. Societal Security

10. Human Security and Diplomacy

Part 2: Contemporary Security Challenges 11. Terrorism

12. Weapons of Mass Destruction 13. Organised Crime, Drug

Trafficking, and Trafficking in Women 14. State Failure and

State Building 15. Migration and Security 16. Cyberthreats

17. Old and New Wars 18. The Privatization of International

Security 19. Energy Security 20. Resources, the Environment

and Conflict 21. Emerging Dangers of Biological Weapons

22. Security and Health in the 21st Century

Part 3: Regional Security Challenges 23. China’s Rise:

Intentions, Power, and Evidence 24. The Korean Peninsula:

On the Brink? 25. Indian Security Policy 26. Pakistan’s

Security Predicament: Religion, Economics, or Geopolitics?

27. Afghanistan: A State in Crisis 28. The Middle East as a

Crisis Region 29. Iran’s Nuclear Challenge 30. Intervention

in Iraq: Regime Change and the Dialectics of State-Building

31. The Israeli-Palestinian Conflict 32. Russia’s Revival

33. The Western Balkans: On the Path to Stability

Part 4: Confronting Security Challenges 34. The European

Union: From Security Community towards Security Actor

35. Alliances 36. Deterrence 37. Coercive Diplomacy:

Scope and Limits, Theory and Policy 38. Peace Operations

39. Humanitarian Intervention 40. Global Governance

41. The Study of Crisis Management

2009: 246 x 174: 504pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46361-4: £125.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86676-4

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011


International Security

An Introduction

Adrian Hyde-Price, University of Bath, UK

This textbook introduces students to the study of

contemporary international security. It is aimed at second

and third year undergraduates as well as postgraduate

students undertaking a taught Masters degree programme.

Eschewing jargon, this textbook is clear and accessible;

with pedagogical features such as boxes, key points,

further reading and student questions.

Key theories and concepts are presented in the introductory

chapters, and applied to the case-studies and empirical

examples in subsequent chapters. Its strong empirical

dimension allows it to illustrate contemporary international

security problems and issues.

The book will be essential reading for upper-level students

of international or global security studies, and recommended

reading for students of strategic studies, war and conflict

studies, terrorism studies and IR in general.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Theories

and Approaches 2. Theories about International Security

3. Globalisation and International Security

Part 2: Contemporary Security Issues 4. Humanitarian

Intervention 5. International Terrorism 6. Nuclear Proliferation

Part 3: Regional Security 7. The Middle East 8. Russia,

Eurasia and Energy Security 9. China and East Asia

10. Human Security and ‘New Wars’ Part 4: Conclusion

11. Conflict and Cooperation in the Twenty-First Century

March 2011: 246 x 174: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55036-9: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-55037-6: £22.99

For more information, visit:



Security Studies

A Reader

Edited by Christopher W. Hughes and Yew Meng

Lai, both at University of Warwick, UK

This reader offers students an

informed overview of the most

significant work in security

studies and features contributions

from many of the leading

scholars in the field. It is divided

into the following sections:

• What is Security?

• Theories of Security

• Security Dimensions and Issues

• Security Frameworks and


• The Future of Security.

In order to guide students through the issues, the book

has a substantial critical introduction exploring the

development of security studies, as well as introductions

to each section and editorial commentary on the readings

themselves. Suggestions for further reading and questions

for discussion are also included in each section.

This book will be invaluable for students of security

studies and international relations.

January 2011: 246 x 174: 400pp

Hb: 978-0-415-32600-1: £95.00

Pb: 978-0-415-32601-8: £26.99

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

Security Studies

An Introduction

Key TiTles 1

Edited by Paul D. Williams, George Washington

University, USA

Security Studies: An

Introduction is the most

comprehensive textbook

available on security studies.

It gives students a detailed

overview of the major

theoretical approaches, key

themes and most significant

issues within security studies.

Selected Contents:

1. Introduction Paul D. Williams

Part 1: Theoretical Approaches

2. Realism Colin Elman 3. Liberalism Cornelia Navari 4. Game

Theory Frank C. Zagare 5. Constructivism Matt McDonald

6. Peace Studies Peter Lawler 7. Critical Theory Pinar Bilgin

8. Feminist Perspectives Sandra Whitworth 9. International

Political Sociology Didier Bigo Part 2: Key Concepts

10. Uncertainty Ken Booth and Nicholas J. Wheeler

11. War Paul D. Williams 12. Terrorism Paul Rogers

13. Genocide and Mass Killing Adam Jones 14. Ethnic

Conflict Stuart J. Kaufman 15. Coercion Lawrence Freedman

and Srinath Rhagavan 16. Human Security Fen Osler Hampson

17. Poverty Caroline Thomas 18. Environmental Change

Simon Dalby 19. Health Colin McInnes Part 3: Institutions

20. Alliances John Duffield 21. Regional Institutions Louise

Fawcett 22. The United Nations Thomas G. Weiss and

Danielle Zach Kalbacher Part 4: Contemporary Challenges

23. International Arms Trade William D. Hartung 24. Nuclear

Proliferation W. Pal Sidhu 25. Counterterrorism Paul R. Pillar

26. Counterinsurgency Joanna Spear 27. Peace Operations

Michael Pugh 28. The Responsibility to Protect Alex J.

Bellamy 29. Private Security Deborah Avant

30. Transnational Organized Crime John T. Picarelli

31. Population Movements Sita Bali 32. Energy Security

Michael T. Klare. Conclusion 33. What Future for Security

Studies? Stuart Croft

2008: 246 x 174: 568pp

Hb: 978-0-415-42561-2: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-42562-9: £25.99

eBook: 978-0-203-92660-4

For more information, visit:



3rd Edition

Masters of War

Classical Strategic Thought

Michael I. Handel

This is a detailed textual analysis of the classical works

on war by Clausewitz, Sun Tzu, Mao Tse-tung, and to a

lesser extent, Jomini and Machiavelli. The author takes a

fresh look at what these strategic thinkers actually said

– not what they are believed to have said. He finds that

despite their apparent differences in terms of time, place,

cultural background, and level of material/technological

development, all had much more in common than

previously supposed.

2000: 234 x 156: 512pp

Hb: 978-0-7146-5091-3: £100.00

Pb: 978-0-7146-8132-0: £27.99

eBook: 978-0-203-01774-6

For more information, visit:



Key TiTles


2nd Edition

Understanding Global Security

Peter Hough, Middlesex University, UK

Fully revised to incorporate

recent developments in world

politics, the second edition of

Understanding Global Security

analyzes the variety of ways

in which people’s lives are

threatened and/or secured in

contemporary global politics.

The traditional focus of Security

Studies texts - war, deterrence

and terrorism - are analyzed

alongside non-military security

issues such as famine, crime, disease, disasters,

environmental degredation and human rights abuses to

provide a comprehensive survey of how and why people

are killed in the contemporary world.

User friendly and easy to follow, this textbook is

designed to make a complex subject accessible to all.

Key features include:

• ‘top ten’ tables highlighting the most destructive events

or forms of death in that area throughout history

• boxed descriptions elaborating key concepts in the

field of security and International Relations

• ‘biographical boxes’ of key individuals who have

shaped world events

• further reading and websites at the end of each

chapter guiding you towards the most up-to-date

information on various topics

• glossary of political terminology.

This highly acclaimed and popular academic text will

continue to be essential reading for everyone interested

in security.

2008: 246 x 174: 312pp

Hb: 978-0-415-42141-6: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-42142-3: £24.99

eBook: 978-0-203-93267-4

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Ethnic Conflict

An Introduction

Rajat Ganguly, Murdoch University, Australia

This new upper-level textbook offers a comprehensive

overview of four key dimensions of ethnic conflict, and

provides six case studies from around the globe.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Key

Dimensions of Ethnic Conflict 2. Ethnic Identity 3. Causes

of Ethnic Conflict 4. Dynamics and Consequences of Ethnic

Conflict 5. Settling Ethnic Conflicts Part 2: Case Studies

6. Ethnic Conflict in Pakistan 7. Ethnic Conflict in the

Philippines 8. Ethnic Conflict in Israel/Palestine 9. Ethnic

Conflict in Turkey 10. Ethnic Conflict in Sudan 11. Ethnic

Conflict in Nigeria Conclusion Select Bibliography

May 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57396-2: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-57397-9: £23.99

For more information, visit:





Doctrine, Operations, and Challenges

Edited by Thomas Rid, American Academy, Berlin,

Germany and Thomas Keaney, Johns Hopkins

University, USA

This textbook offers an

accessible introduction to

counterinsurgency operations, a

key aspect of modern warfare.

Featuring essays by some of

the world’s leading experts on

unconventional conflict, both

scholars and practitioners, the

book discusses how modern

regular armed forces react,

and should react, to irregular

warfare. The volume is divided

into three main sections:

• Doctrinal Origins: analysing the intellectual and

historical roots of modern Western theory and practice

• Operational Aspects: examining the specific role of

various military services in counterinsurgency, but also

special forces, intelligence, and local security forces

• Challenges: looking at wider issues, such as

governance, culture, ethics, civil-military cooperation,

information operations, and time.

Understanding Counterinsurgency is the first

comprehensive textbook on counterinsurgency, and

will be essential reading for all students of small wars,

counterinsurgency and counterterrorism, strategic

studies and security studies, both in graduate and

undergraduate courses as well as in professional

military schools.

Selected Contents: 1. Understanding Counterinsurgency

Thomas Keaney and Thomas Rid Part 1: Doctrine

2. France Etienne de Durand 3. Britain Alexander Alderson

4. Germany Timo Noetzel 5. United States Conrad Crane

Part 2: Operational Aspects 6. Army Peter Mansoor

7. Marine Corps Frank Hoffman 8. Airpower Charles Dunlap, Jr

9. Naval Support Martin Murphy 10. Special Operations Kalev

Sepp 11. Intelligence David Kilcullen 12. Local Security Forces

John Nagl Part 3: Challenges 13. Governance Nadia

Schadlow 14. Culture Montgomery McFate 15. Ethics

Sarah Sewall 16. Information Operations Andrew Exum

17. Civil-Military Integration Michelle Parker and Matthew

Irvine 18. Time Austin Long 19. Counterinsurgency in

Context Thomas Rid and Thomas Keaney. Suggested

Further Reading

April 2010: 246 x 174: 280pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77764-3: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77765-0: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-85237-8

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


Explaining Terrorism

Causes, Processes and Consequences

Martha Crenshaw, Stanford University, USA

Series: Cass Series on Political Violence

This volume comprises some of the key essays by

Professor Crenshaw, from 1972 to the present-day, on

the causes, processes and consequences of terrorism.

Since the early 1970s, scholars and practitioners have

tried to explain terrorism and to assess the effectiveness

of government responses to the threat. From its

beginnings in a small handful of analytical studies, the

research field has expanded to thousands of entries,

with an enormous spike following the 9/11 attacks. The

field of terrorism studies is now impressive in terms of

quantity, scope, and variety. Professor Crenshaw had

studied terrorism since the late 1960s, well before it was

topical, and this selection of her work represents the

development of her thought over time in four areas:

• defining terrorism and identifying its causes

• the different methods used to explain terrorism,

including strategic, organisational and psychological


• how campaigns of terrorism end

• how governments can effectively contribute to

the ending of terrorism.

This collection of essays by one of the pioneering

thinkers in the field of terrorism studies will be essential

reading for all students of political violence and

terrorism, security studies and IR/politics in general.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Definitions, Approaches,

Trajectories, and Responses Part 1: What and Why?

1. The Concept of Terrorism 2. The Causes of Terrorism

3. ’Old’ vs. ’New’ Terrorism Part 2: Explaining Terrorism:

Organizations, Strategies, and Psychology 4. The

Organizational Approach 5. Subjective Realities 6. The Logic

of Terrorism 7. Psychological Constraints on Instrumental

Reasoning Part 3: Responding to Terrorism 8. Coercive

Diplomacy 9. Strategies and Grand Strategies

10. Counterterrorism Policy and the Political Process

Part 4: How Terrorism Ends 11. How Terrorism Declines

12. Why Terrorism is Rejected or Renounced

October 2010: 234 x 156: 280pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78050-6: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-78051-3: £22.99

For more information, visit:


relaTed jourNal

Contemporary Security


Editors: Aaron Karp and Regina Karp,

both at Old Dominion University, USA

One of the oldest peer reviewed journals

in international conflict and security,

Contemporary Security Policy promotes

theoretically-based research on policy problems

of armed violence, peace building and conflict

resolution. Since it first appeared in 1980,

CSP has established its unique place as a

meeting ground for research at the nexus

of theory and policy.

For more information on the journal,

including subscription details, please visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

3rd Edition

Terrorism Versus Democracy

The Liberal State Response

Paul Wilkinson, University of St. Andrews, UK

Series: Cass Series on Political Violence

’From one of the founding fathers of terrorism

studies, an urgent and necessary reminder of that

which we must hold dear in combating all forms

of terrorism. Paul Wilkinson understands the vital

lessons to be learned from responding to terrorism,

and this updated edition of his landmark book is

absolutely essential reading.’ – John Horgan,

University of St. Andrews, UK

‘This is a well-argued, balanced book on a subject

where sound judgement is often lacking. Professor

Wilkinson, one of the leading authorities on the

subject of terrorism, discusses both the terrorist

threat and the appropriateness of military, legal

and diplomatic responses with clarity and persuasion.

This book is an important addition to the literature

on terrorism and deserves to be widely read.’

– Alex Schmid

This acclaimed study examines both the new terror

networks and those that have been around for decades.

This new edition brings it up-to-date with the dramatic

opening of the twenty-first century, with new chapters

on the 9/11 attacks, the growth of international terrorism,

the Al Qaeda network and the War on Terror.

This text provides us with some much needed criteria for

distinguishing between terrorists and freedom fighters

and an explanation of the uses of terrorism as a political,

social, religious and criminal weapon. Wilkinson also

links the use of terrorism to a wider repertoire of

struggle. He proposes a variety of possible countermeasures

and valuable principles carefully distilled from

the recent past to help design a response that is

compatible with democratic principles, the rule of law

and respect for human rights.

This book is essential reading for undergraduate and

postgraduate students of terrorism studies, political

science and international relations, as well as for policy

makers and journalists.

Selected Contents: Preface. Glossary of Terrorist Groups.

Introduction to Revised Edition 1. Terrorism, Insurgency and

Asymmetrical Conflict 2. The Emergence of Modern

Terrorism 3. Origins and Key Characteristics of Al Qaeda

4. Terrorist Backed Insurgencies 5. Politics, Diplomacy and

Peace Processes: Pathways out of Terrorism? 6. Law-

Enforcement, Criminal Justice and the Liberal State 7. The

Role of the Military in Combating Terrorism 8. Hostage-

Taking, Sieges and Problems of Response 9. Aviation Security

10. The Media and Terrorism 11. International Cooperation

Against Terrorism 12. The Future of Terrorism 13. Conclusion.

Further Reading and Bibliography

January 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58800-3: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-58799-0: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Terrorism Studies

A Reader

Edited by John Horgan and Kurt Braddock, both

at Pennsylvania State University, USA

This book is a comprehensive

Terrorism Studies Reader that

aims to introduce and guide

students through the most

important articles on the subject

of terrorism and political


Selected Contents: Studying

Terrorism: An Introduction

Section 1: Terrorism in Historical

Context Section 2: Definitions

Section 3: Understanding

and Explaining Terrorism

Section 4: Terrorist Movements Section 5: Terrorist Behaviour

Section 6: Counterterrorism Section 7: Current Trends in

Terrorism Section 8: The Future of Terrorism. Conclusions

March 2011: 246 x 174: 480pp

Hb: 978-0-415-45504-6: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-45505-3: £26.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Terrorism: The Basics

James Lutz and Brenda J. Lutz, both at Indiana

University-Purdue, USA

Series: The Basics

Terrorism: The Basics is an

ideal starting point for anyone

interested in one of the most

discussed, written about and

analysed aspects of modern life.

Common misconceptions about

the nature of terrorism and

terrorists themselves are dispelled

as the authors provide clear and

jargon-free answers to the big


• What does terrorism involve?

• Who can be classified as a terrorist?

• What are terrorists trying to achieve?

• Who are the supporters of terrorism?

• Can there ever be an end to terrorist activity?

These questions and more are answered with reference

to contemporary groups and situations allowing readers

to relate theory to what they have seen on the news.

Written with clarity and insight, this book is the perfect

first book on terrorism for students of all levels.

Selected Contents: 1. What is Terrorism? 2. What do the

Terrorists Want? 3. Who are the Terrorists? 4. What are the

Techniques? 5. Who are the Targets of Terrorists? 6. Who

Supports the Terrorists? 7. Some Major Terrorist Groups

8. What can be Done to Counter Terrorism? 9. Will Terrorism

Continue? 10. Conclusions

March 2011: 198 x 129: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57333-7: £55.00

Pb: 978-0-415-57334-4: £11.99

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

Forthcoming in 2011

Key TiTles 3


Conflict, Security and


An Introduction

Paul Jackson and Danielle Beswick, both at

University of Birmingham, UK

This new textbook addresses

the the impact of conflict and

security on development

initiatives. Currently, there is

no available textbook that

marries academic teaching and

approaches with practical policy

experience in the way this one

does. The authors integrate

these elements through three

key features:

• uses the best of recent

academic theory, field research and policy to provide

an overview of the connections between security and


• explores the implications of these connections for the

theory and practice of development

• investigates the challenges that arise for post-conflict

reconstruction when we recognise that security and

development are mutually contingent.

The authors are experienced in both the theory and

practice of development and conflict, and illustrate the

theory about the links between conflict, security and

development with practical examples, drawing on

up-to-date literature and personal experience. Each

chapter is informed by student pedagogy and the book

will be essential reading for all students of development

studies, war and conflict studies, and human security,

and is recommended for students of international

security and IR in general.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Security and

Development - Mutually Reinforcing? 3. Accounting for

Conflict in the Developing World 4. The Changing Nature

of Conflict and its Impact on Development 5. Development

Actors in War 6. International and Humanitarian Intervention

7. The Privatisation of Security 8. Development and Security

in Post-Conflict Environments 9 . International Responses

to the Development-Security Dilemma 10. Conclusions:

Development and Security - Reconnecting the Threads.

Select Bibliography

March 2011: 246 x 174: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49984-2: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-49983-5: £22.99

For more information, visit:



Key TiTles


War, Conflict and

Human Rights

Theory and Practice

Chandra Lekha Sriram, Olga Martin-Ortega and

Johanna Herman, all at University of East London, UK

‘What makes this book such

a superb teaching tool? The

text begins by providing

separate background

chapters on human rights

and conflict studies. This

makes the case studies and

topical chapters completely

accessible for a wide range

of students. Clearly written

and completely up-to-date,

War, Conflict and Human

Rights will undoubtedly find

itself on the mandatory reading list of many

syllabi.’ – Julie Mertus, American University, USA

War, Conflict and Human Rights is an innovative new

inter-disciplinary textbook, combining aspects of law,

politics and conflict analysis to examine the relationship

between human rights and armed conflict.

Making use of both theoretical and practical approaches,

this book:

• examines the tensions and complementarities between

protection of human rights and resolution of conflict

• explores the scope and effects of human rights

violations in contemporary armed conflicts

• assesses the legal and institutional accountability

mechanisms developed in the wake of armed conflict

to punish violations of human rights law and

international humanitarian law

• discusses continuing and emergent global trends and

challenges in the fields of human rights and conflict


Selected Contents: Glossary. How to use this text

Part 1: War and Human Rights: Critical Issues 1. The

Interplay between War and Human Rights 2. Conflict:

Fundamentals and Debates 3. Human Rights: History and

Debates 4. Humanitarian and Human Rights Law in Armed

Conflict Part 2: Contemporary Conflict: Critical Cases

5. The Former Yugoslavia 6. Sierra Leone 7. The Democratic

Republic of Congo 8. Sudan 9. The ’Global War on Terror’

Part 3: Building Peace and Seeking Accountability:

Recent Mechanisms and Institutions 10. Ad Hoc

Tribunals 11. Enforcing Human Rights Transnationally

12. Hybrid Tribunals 13. The International Criminal Court

15. Enduring and Emergent Challenges and Opportunities

2009: 246 x 174: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-45205-2: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-45206-9: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-87474-5

For more information, visit:



Conflict Management

and Resolution

An Introduction

Ho-Won Jeong, George Mason University, USA

Conflict Management and

Resolution provides students

with an overview of the main

theories of conflict management

and conflict resolution, and will

equip them to respond to the

complex phenomena of

international conflict.

The book covers these four

key concepts in detail:

• negotiation

• mediation

• facilitation

• reconciliation.

It examines how to prevent, manage and eventually

resolve various types of conflict that originate from

inter-state and inter-group competition, and expands

the existing scope of conflict management and

resolution theories by examining emerging theories

on the identity, power and structural dimensions of

adversarial relationships. The volume is designed to

enhance our understanding of effective response

strategies to conflict in multiple social settings as well

as violent struggles, and utilizes numerous case studies,

both past and current. These include the Iranian and

North Korean nuclear weapons programmes, the war

in Lebanon, the Arab-Israeli conflict, civil wars in Africa,

and ethnic conflicts in Europe and Asia.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Anatomy of Conflict and

Conflict Resolution 1. Perspectives on Conflict Resolution

2. Managing Conflict Dynamics 3. Conflict Transformation

Part 2: Dimensions of Conflict 4. Identity 5. Power

6. Structure Part 3: Settlement and Resolution

Procedures 7. Comparative context 8. Negotiation

9. Mediation 10. Facilitation 11. Reconciliation

2009: 246 x 174: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-45040-9: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-45041-6: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-86497-5

For more information, visit:



International Conflict


Michael J. Butler, Clark University, USA

This new textbook provides

students with an accessible

overview of the logic, evolution,

application and outcomes of

the five major approaches of

the growing field of

international conflict


• traditional peacekeeping

• peace enforcement and

support operations

• negotiation and bargaining

• mediation

• adjudication.

The book aims to provide the student with a fuller

understanding of the strengths and weaknesses of these

five techniques within the contemporary security

environment. To demonstrate the changing nature of

security in the post-Cold War world, the text contrasts

this with competing visions of security during the Cold

War and earlier periods, and provides numerous points

of comparison with the dominant causes, types, strategy,

and prosecution of warfare in other eras.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Continuity and

Change 1. What is International Security Management?

2. The Changing Nature of Security 3. The Challenges of

New Wars Part 2: Concepts and Application

4. Peacekeeping 5. A Study in Peacekeeping: UNOMIG

in Georgia 6. Mediation 7. A Study in Mediation: IGAD

in Sudan 8. Peace Enforcement 9. A Study in Peace

Enforcement: INTERFET in East Timor 10. International

Adjudication 11. A Study in International Adjudication:

The Mapiripán Massacre 12. Conclusion

2009: 246 x 174: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77229-7: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77230-3: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-87915-3

For more information, visit:


US Defense Politics

The Origins of Security Policy

Harvey Sapolsky, MIT, Cambridge, USA, Eugene

Gholz, University of Texas, Austin, USA and Caitlin

Talmadge, MIT, Cambridge, USA

This new textbook explains how

US defence and national

security policy is formulated and


Selected Contents: Preface

Part 1: Introduction

Part 2: America’s Security Strategy

Part 3: Who Fights America’s

Wars? Part 4: The Military and

National Politics Part 5: The

Political Economy of Defense

Part 6: The Weapons Acquisition

Process Part 7: Managing Defense

Part 8: Service Politics Part 9: Congress, Special Interests,

and the President Part 10: Homeland Security

Part 11: Preparing for the Next War

2008: 246 x 174: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77265-5: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77266-2: £21.99

eBook: 978-0-203-89247-3

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Forthcoming in 2011

Intelligence and Politics

An Introduction

Philip Davies, Brunel University, UK

This book is the first introduction to the key concepts

and issues in intelligence for students. It covers general

ideas, methods, problems and debates in the field, and

takes a global perspective, using examples from a range

of national intelligence systems. The book is divided into

three key areas: intelligence itself, the role of intelligence

in government, and political issues and debates

surrounding intelligence.

Selected Contents: Introduction. Introduction for Course

Convenors 1. What is Intelligence? The Elements of

Intelligence 2. Collection: Sources and Methods

3. Counter-Intelligence: Protecting Intelligence 4. Covert

Action: War by Other Means 5. Analysis and Estimates:

Putting the Pieces Together 6. Requirements and Priorities:

The Need to Know Intelligence in Government

7. Intelligence and Policy: The Producer-Consumer Interface

8. The Intelligence Community: Coordination and Integration

9. Causes of Intelligence Failure: Why it Goes Wrong

10. Defence Support: Information for Combat 11. Police

Intelligence: Information for Law Enforcement Intelligence

and Politics 12. Ethics and Intelligence 13. Intelligence and

Democracy I: Surveillance and Civil Liberties 14. Intelligence

and Democracy II: Accountability and Oversight

15. Intelligence and Democracy III: Proportionality and the

Law 16. Intelligence in Non-Democratic States: Espionage

and Regime Security

June 2011: 246 x 174: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-42869-9: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-42868-2: £22.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

2nd Edition

War, Peace and International


An Introduction to Strategic History

Colin S. Gray

’The author’s discussions and clarity of thought and

expression make this work ideal as a textbook for

introducing civilian students and prospective

military officers of the various military academies

to the subject.’ – Parameters

This updated and revised second edition of Colin Gray’s

textbook explores the theory and practice of war and

peace in a modern historical context.

Selected Contents: 1. Strategic History, 1800-2025: Themes

and Contexts 2. Carl von Clausewitz and the Theory of War

3. From Limited War to National War: The French Revolution

and the Napoleonic Way of War 4. The Nineteenth Century,

I: A Strategic View 5. The Nineteenth Century, II: Technology,

Warfare, and International Order 6. The Great War and the

Invention of Modern Warfare, 1914-18 7. The Twenty-Year

Armistice, 1919-1939 8. The Second World War in Europe, I:

The Structure and Course of Total War 9. The Second World

War in Europe, II: Understanding the War 10. The Second

World War in Asia-Pacific, I: Politics 11. The Second World

War in Asia-Pacific, II: Strategy 12. The Cold War, I: Politics

and Ideology 13. The Cold War, II: The Nuclear Revolution

14. War and Peace After the Cold War: The Interwar Decade

15. 9/11 and the Age of Terror

July 2011: 246 x 174: 352pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59485-1: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-59487-5: £24.99

For more information, visit:


Strategic Studies

A Reader

Edited by Thomas Mahnken, Johns Hopkins

University, USA and Joseph A. Maiolo, King’s

College, University of London, UK

This Reader brings together

key essays on strategic theory

by some of the leading

contributors in the field. It

guides students through both

the theoretical and practical

aspects of Strategic Studies, and

includes both classic essays and

works of contemporary


Selected Contents:

Part 1: The Uses of Strategic

Theory Introduction. Strategy as a Science Bernard Brodie.

Strategic Studies and the Problem of Power Lawrence

Freedman. What is a Military Lesson? William C. Fuller

Part 2: Interpretation of the Classics Introduction. The

Art of War Sun Tzu. Strategy: The Indirect Approach Basil

Liddell Hart. Arms and Influence Thomas C. Schelling

Part 3: Instruments of War: Land, Sea, and Air Power

Introduction. J.F.C. Fuller’s Theory of Mechanized Warfare

Brian Holden Reid. Some Principles of Maritime Strategy

Julian Corbett. Air Power and the Origins of Deterrence Theory

Before 1939 Richard J. Overy. Kosovo and the Great Air

Power Debate Daniel L. Byman and Matthew C. Waxman

Part 4: Nuclear Strategy Introduction. The Absolute Weapon

Bernard Brodie. The Delicate Balance of Terror Albert

Wohlstetter Part 5: Irregular Warfare and Small Wars

Introduction. Science of Guerrilla Warfare T.E. Lawrence.

Problems of Strategy in China’s Civil War Mao Tse Tung.

Counterinsurgency Warfare: Theory and Practice David

Galula. Why Big Nations Lose Small Wars: The Politics of

Asymmetric Conflict Andrew Mack. Countering Global

Insurgency David J. Kilcullen. Strategic Terrorism: The

Framework and its Fallacies Michael Smith and Peter

Neumann Part 6: Future Warfare, Future Strategy

Introduction. Cavalry to Computer: The Patterns of Military

Revolutions Andrew F. Krepinevich. From Kadesh to

Kandahar: Military Theory and the Future of War Michael

Evans. Why Strategy is Difficult Colin S. Gray. The War

on Terror in Historical Perspective Adam Roberts. The Lost

Meaning of Strategy Hew Strachan

2008: 246 x 174: 464pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77221-1: £95.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77222-8: £26.99

eBook: 978-0-203-92846-2

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

Key TiTles 5


2nd Edition


A Guide for the Twenty-First Century

Geoffrey Till, Joint Services Command and Staff

College / Kings College London, UK

Series: Cass Series: Naval Policy and History

’A landmark work. Seapower:

A Guide for the Twenty-First

Century delivers gloriously

what it promises in its subtitle…

Till’s excellent book will

dominate maritime reading

lists for years to come.’

– Colin S. Gray, RUSI Journal

The sea has always been

central to human development

as a source of resources, and

as a means of transportation,

information-exchange and strategic dominion. It has

been the basis for our prosperity and security. This is even

more the case, now, in the early twenty-first century,

with the emergence of an increasingly globalized world

trading system.

This updated and expanded new edition of Geoffrey

Till’s acclaimed book is an essential guide for students

of naval history and maritime strategy, and anyone

interested in the changing and crucial role of seapower

in the 21st century.

Selected Contents: Foreword Admiral Sir Jonathon

Band KCB ADC 1. Seapower in a Globalised World – Two

Tendencies 2. Defining Seapower 3. Who Said What and

Why It Matters 4. The Constituents of Maritime Power

5. Navies and Technology 6. Command of the Sea and Sea

Control 7. Securing Command of the Sea 8. Exploiting

Command of the Sea 9. Expeditionary Operations 10. Naval

Diplomacy 11. Good Order at Sea 12. Theory and Practice:

The Asia-Pacific Region: A Case Study 13. Conclusions?

2009: 246 x 174: 432pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48088-8: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-48089-5: £27.99

eBook: 978-0-203-88048-7

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

US National Security Policy

Origins, Politics, and Contemporary


Alexandra Homolar-Riechmann, Warwick

University, UK

The text explores how the United States, as the

hegemonic player in the international arena, defines its

security interests and objectives, perceives and articulates

threats to these goals, and develops polices to protect and

enhance its security objectives to counter these threats.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Background:

Theories, Concepts and Actors 1. Understanding Security

2. Theoretical Perspectives on the Making of Security Policy

3. Key Actors and Institutions in the Making of US Security

Policy 4. The Origins of the Contemporary US Security Policy

Apparatus and Interests Part 2: Post-Cold War US

Approaches to Security 5. US Security Policy after the Cold

War 6. US Security Policy in the War on Terror 7. US Security

Policy in the Age of Obama. Conclusion: The US and the

Governance of International Security. Select Bibliography

June 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78190-9: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-78191-6: £23.99

For more information, visit:



CriTiCal seCuriTy sTudies




The Routledge Handbook

of New Security Studies

Edited by J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway

This new Handbook gathers

together state-of-the-art

theoretical reflection and

empirical research by a group

of leading international scholars

in the subdiscipline of Critical

Security Studies.

In today’s globalised setting,

the challenge of maintaining

security is no longer limited

to the traditional foreign-policy

and military tools of the

nation-state, and security and insecurity are no longer

considered as dependent only upon geopolitics and

military strength, but rather are also seen to depend

upon social, economic, environmental, ethical models

of analysis and tools of action. The contributors discuss

and evaluate this fundamental shift in four key areas:

• new security concepts

• new security subjects

• new security objects

• new security practices.

Offering a comprehensive theoretical and empirical

overview of this evolving field, this book will be essential

reading for all students of critical security studies, human

security, international/global security, political theory and

IR in general.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction J. Peter Burgess

Part 1: New Security Concepts 2. Civilizational Security

Brett Bowden 3. Risk Oliver Kessler 4. Small Arms Keith

Krause 5. Critical Human Security Taylor Owen 6. Critical

Geopolitics Simon Dalby Part 2: New Security Subjects

7. Biopolitics Michael Dillon 8. Gendered Security Laura

Shepherd 9. Identity Security Pinar Bilgin 10. Security as

Ethics Anthony Burke 11. Financial Security Marieke de

Goede 12. International Law and Security Kristin B. Sandvik

Part 3: New Security Objects 13. Environmental Security

Jon Barnett 14. Food Security Rachel Slater and Steve

Wiggins 15. Energy Security Roland Dannreuther 16. Cyber

Security Myriam Dunn Cavelty 17. Pandemic Security

Stephan Elbe 18. Biosecurity Frida Kuhlau and John Hart

Part 4: New Security Practices 19. Surveillance Mark

Salter 20. Urban Insecurity David Murakami Wood

21. Privatization of Security Anna Leander 22. Migration

William Walters 23. Security Technologies Emmanuel-Pierre

Guittet and Julien Jeandesboz 24. Designing Security

Cynthia Weber and Mark Lacy 25. New Mobile Crime

Monica den Boer

January 2010: 246 x 174: 328pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48437-4: £125.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85948-3

For more information, visit:



Critical Security Studies

An Introduction

Columba Peoples, Swansea University, UK and

Nick Vaughan-Williams, University of Exeter, UK

Critical Security Studies

introduces students of politics

and international relations to

the sub-field through a detailed

yet accessible survey of

emerging theories and practices.

Written in an accessible and

clear manner, this textbook:

• offers a comprehensive and

up-to-date introduction to

critical security studies

• locates Critical Security Studies within the broader

context of social and political theory

• evaluates fundamental theoretical positions in critical

security studies against backdrop of new security


The book is divided into two main parts. The first part,

‘Approaches’, surveys the newly extended and contested

theoretical terrain of Critical Security Studies, and the

different schools within the subdiscipline, including

Feminist, Postcolonial and Poststructuralist viewpoints.

The second part offers examples of how these various

theoretical approaches have been put to work against

the backdrop of a diverse range of issues.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Approaches 1. Critical

Theory and Security 2. Feminist and Gender Approaches

3. Postcolonial Perspectives 4. Poststructuralism and

International Political Sociology 5. Securitization Theory

Part 2: Issues 6. Environmental Security 7. Homeland

Security and the ‘War against Terrorism’ 8. Human Security

and Development 9. Migration and Border Security

10. Technology and Warfare in the Information Age

June 2010: 246 x 174: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48443-5: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-48444-2: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-84747-3

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Critical Theory in

International Relations

and Security Studies

Interviews and Reflections

Edited by Shannon Brincat, University of

Queensland, Australia, and Laura Lima and

Joao Nunes, both at Aberystwyth University, UK

Critical Theory in International Relations and Security

Studies is the first book to present first hand interviews

with some of the pioneering scholars of the disciplines.

Through dialogical and reflective essays, it assesses the

state of critical thinking in IR and security studies, and looks

to the future of the discipline and theoretical developments.

Selected Contents: Introduction Shannon Brincat, Laura

Limes and Joao Nunes Part 1: Interviews Robert Cox,

Andrew Linklater, Ken Booth, Richard Wyn Jones Part 2:

Commentaries Brooke Ackerly, Richard Ashley, Pinar Bilgin,

James Der Derian, Richard Devetak, John M. Hobson, Mark

Neufeld, Mustapha K. Pasha, Martin Weber, Michael C.

Williams, Marysia Zalewski. Conclusion Mark Hoffman

March 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60157-3: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-60158-0: £24.99

For more information, visit:


PRIO New Security Studies

Series edited by J. Peter Burgess,

PRIO, Oslo, Norway

The aim of this new book series is to

gather state-of-the-art theoretical reflection

and empirical research into a core set of

volumes that respond vigorously and

dynamically to new challenges to security

studies scholarship.


Critical Perspectives on

Human Security

Rethinking Emancipation and Power

in International Relations

Edited by David Chandler, University of

Westminster, UK and Nik Hynek, Institute

of International Relations, Czech Republic

This new book presents critical approaches towards

Human Security, which has become one of the key areas

for policy and academic debate within Security Studies

and IR.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction David Chandler and Nik

Hynek Part 1: Human Security and Emancipation 2. ‘We

the Peoples’: Contending Discourses of Security in Human

Rights Theory and Practice Tim Dunne and Nicholas J.

Wheeler 3. Development of the Human Security Field: A

Critical Examination David Bosold 4. Has Human Security

Had Its Day? Neil Cooper, Mandy Turner

and Michael Pugh 5. Human Security, Biopoverty and the

Possibility for Emancipation David Roberts 6. Emancipatory

Forms of Human Security and Liberal Peacebuilding Oliver

P. Richmond 7. Towards a Critical Security Paradigm?

Reconceptualizing the ‘Vital Core’ of Human Security Giorgio

Shani 8. The Siren Song of Human Security Ryerson Christie

9. The Limits to Emancipation in the Human Security

Framework Tara McCormack Part 2: Human Security and

Regimes of Power 10. Human Security and the Securing

of Human Life: Tracing Global Sovereign and Biopolitical Rule

Marc G. Doucet and Miguel de Larrinaga 11. Rethinking

Human Security: Economy, Governmentality and

Hybridization of Individuals 12. Human Security: Sovereignty,

Citizenship, Disorder Kyle Grayson 13. (Bio)Human Security

Julian Reid 14. Inhuman Security Mark Neocleous 15. Living

not Human: The Biopolitics of Security Mick Dillon 16. Human

Security and the Globalization of the Political David Chandler.


July 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56734-3: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84758-9

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Forthcoming in 2011

Biopolitics of Security

in the 21st Century

A Political Analytic of Finitude

Michael Dillon, University of Lancaster, UK

This work is an original introduction to the emerging

field of the biopolitics of security, tracking its

development into the 21st century, which will serve as

an intellectual provocation to researchers as much as it

will a pedagogical guide to graduate and undergraduate


This volume will provide a genealogy of the biopolitics of

security beginning with Michel Foucault’s original

account of the rise of biopolitics at the beginning of the

18th century, and will clarify and further develop

Foucault’s original analytic of the biopolitics of security.

This book will be of great interest to students of critical

security studies, IR theory, political theory, philosophy

and ancillary social science disciplines, such as

criminology and sociology.

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48432-9: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-48433-6: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Liberal Terror

Global Security, Divine Power

and Emergency Rule

Brad Evans, University of Leeds, UK

This book offers a genealogical investigation into

the phenomenon of terror in the 21st century.

Selected Contents: 1. Battle for the Soul of the 21st

Century 2. The Liberal Theology 3. Life in Circulation

4. Deliverance from Evil 5. Pure Violence 6. Terror in all


July 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58882-9: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The Politics of Catastrophe

Genealogies of the Unknown

Edited by Claudia Aradau, Open University and

Rens Van Munster, University of Southern Denmark

This book explores the governmentality of terror as a

complex discursive and institutional formation deployed

at the horizon of a catastrophic future.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Governing

Catastrophe 1. Catastrophic Futures 2. Taming the Future:

Worst Case Scenarios 3. Domesticating Uncertainty:

Terrorism Insurance 4. The Aestheticisation of Catastrophe

Part 2: Rethinking Catastrophe 5. Catastrophe and

Modernity: Lisbon 6. ‘Never again!’: Auschwitz and

Hiroshima 7. New York: Politicising Catastrophe

8. Conclusion: Politics in/of the Present

April 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49809-8: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Securitization Theory

How Security Problems Emerge and Dissolve

Edited by Thierry Balzacq, University of Namur and

Louvain, Belgium

This volume aims to provide a

new framework for the analysis

of securitization processes,

increasing our understanding

of how security issues emerge,

evolve and dissolve.

Selected Contents: 1. A Theory

of Securitization: Origins, Core

Assumptions, and Variants Thierry

Balzacq 2. Enquiries Into Methods:

A New Framework for

Securitization Analysis Thierry

Balzacq Part 1: The Rules of

Securitization 3. Reconceptualizing the Audience in

Securitization Theory Sarah Léonard and Christian Kaunert

4. Securitization as a Media Frame Fred Vultee 5. The Limits

of Spoken Words: From Meta-narratives to Experiences of

Security Claire Wilkinson 6. When Securitization Fails: The

Hard Case of Counter-terrorism Programmes Mark B. Salter

Part 2: Securitization and De-securitization in Practice

7. Rethinking the Securitization of Environment: Old Beliefs,

New Insights Julia Trombetta 8. Health Issues and

Securitization: HIV/AIDS as a US National Security Threat

Roxanna Sjostedt 9. Securitization, Culture and Power: Rogue

States in US and German Discourse Holger Stritzel and Dirk

Schmittchen 10. Religion Bites: The Securitization of – and

Desecuritization Moves by – Falungong Practitioners in the

People’s Republic of China Juha A. Vuori 11. The Continuing

Evolution of Securitization Theory Michael C. Williams

August 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55627-9: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-55628-6: £24.99

eBook: 978-0-203-86850-8

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The Ethical Subject of Security

Geopolitical Reason and

The Threat to Europe

J. Peter Burgess, PRIO, Oslo, Norway

This book studies the subject of security in terms of

underlying values, and uncovers a level of security

practice that has not been covered by other

theorizations of security.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Ethical Subject 1. The

Ethical Subject of Security 2. Insecurity of the European

Community of Values 3. The Gendered Subject of Security

4. The Ethical-Core of the Nation State Part 2: Holding

Together 6. Identity Community, Security 7. European

Security Identity 8. The Federalist Vision of Europe

9. Identity and the Intolerable: Pluralism and Structure

of Threat Part 3: Geopolitics of Community

10. Cosmopolitan Europe 11. The Nomos of Europe

12. Justice in the Political Community 13. War in the

Name of Europe

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49982-8: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-49981-1: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

CriTiCal seCuriTy sTudies 7


Security and Global


Globalization, Governance and the State

Edited by Miguel de Larrinaga, University of

Ottawa, Canada and Marc G. Doucet, Saint Mary’s

University, Canada

This book examines global

governance through Foucaultian

notions of governmentality and

security, as well as the complex

intersections between the two.

Selected Contents: Introduction:

The Global Governmentalization

of Security and the Securitization

of Global Governance Miguel de

Larrinaga and Marc G. Doucet

Part 1: Historical Treatments

and Critical Readings

1. European Diplomacy and the

Origins of Governmentality Kevin McMillan 2. Governing

Circulation: A Critique of the Biopolitics of Security Claudia

Aradau and Tobias Blanke Part 2: Global Governmentality

and Global War 3. Neoliberal Political Economy and the

Iraq War: A Contribution to the Debate about Global

Biopolitics Nicholas J. Kiersey 4. The New Frontiers of the

National Security State: The US Global Governmentality of

Contingency David Grondin 5. Governmentality, Sovereign

Power, and Intervention: Security Council Resolutions and

the Invasion of Iraq Miguel de Larrinaga and Marc G. Doucet

Part 3: Securitizing Global Governance: Contemporary

Cases 6. Circulation of Desire: The Security Governance of

the International ’Mail-Order Brides’ Industry Anne-Marie

D’Aoust 7. Governmentalizing the State: The Disciplining

Logic of Human Security Nadine Voelkner 8. Thinking Locally,

Acting Globally: The Governmentalization-Securitization

Interplay in Recent Advanced-Liberal Peace Machinery Nik Hynek

May 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56058-0: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86573-6

For more information, visit:


Security, Risk and

the Biometric State

Governing Borders and Bodies

Benjamin J. Muller, King’s University College

at University of Western Ontario, Canada

This book explores how ‘virtual

borders’ are created and the

effect they have upon the

politics of citizenship and

immigration, especially how

they contribute to the treatment

of citizens as suspects.

February 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48440-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85804-2

For more information, visit:




CriTiCal seCuriTy sTudies

Conflict, Security and the

Reshaping of Society

The Civilization of War

Edited by Alessandro Dal Lago and

Salvatore Palidda, both at Universita di Genova, Italy

Series: Routledge Studies in Liberty and Security

This book is an examination of the effect of

contemporary wars (such as the ’War on Terror’)

on civil life at a global level.

Selected Contents: Introduction Alessandro Dal Lago and

Salvatore Palidda Part 1: The Constituent Role of Armed

Conflicts 1. Fields Without Honour: Contemporary War as

Global Enforcement Alessandro Dal Lago 2. The Barbarization

of the Peace: The Neo-Conservative Transformation of War

and Perspectives Alain Joxe 3. Norm/Exception: Exceptionalism

and Governmental Prospects Roberto Ciccarelli 4. Reversing

Clausewitz? War and Politics in French Philosophy: Michel

Foucault, Deleuze-Guattari and Raymond Aron Massimiliano

Guareschi 5. Global War and Technoscience Luca Guzzetti

Part 2: Securisation 6. September 14, 2001: The Regression

to the Habitus Didier Bigo 7. Revolution in Police Affairs

Salvatore Palidda 8. Surveillance: From Resistance to Support

Eric Heilmann 9. Enemies, Not Criminals: The Law and Courts

Against Global Terrorism Gabriella Petti Part 3: The Reshaping

of Global Society 10. Media at War Marcello Maneri

11. Global Bureaucracy: Irresponsible But Not Indifferent

Mariella Pandolfi and Laurence Mcfall 12. The Space of

Camps: Towards a Genealogy of Places of Internment in

the Present Federico Rahola

July 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57034-3: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84631-5

For more information, visit:



Experiencing War

Edited by Christine Sylvester, University

of Lancaster, UK

Series: War, Politics and Experience

This edited collection explores

aspects of contemporary war

that affect average people –

physically, emotionally, and

ethically through activities

ranging from combat to

television viewing.

Selected Contents: 1. Experiencing

War: An Introduction Christine

Sylvester 2. The Passions of

Protection: Sovereign Authority

and Humanitarian War Anne

Orford 3. Gendered

Humanitarianism: Reconsidering the Ethics of War Kimberly

Hutchings 4. Wars, Bodies, and Development Brigitte Holzner

5. Ruling Exceptions: Female Soldiers and Everyday Experiences

of Civil Conflict Megan MacKenzie 6. Experiencing the Cold

War Heonik Kwon 7. On The Uselessness of New Wars

Theory: Lessons From African Conflicts Stephen Chan

8. Dilemmas of Drawing War Jill Gibbon 9. Pathways

to Experiencing War Christine Sylvester

October 2010: 234 x 156: 152pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56630-8: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-56631-5: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-83999-7

For more information, visit:



Critical Perspectives on the

Responsibility to Protect

Interrogating Theory and Practice

Edited by Philip Cunliffe, University of Kent, UK

Series: Routledge Studies in Intervention and


This edited volume critically examines the widely

supported doctrine of the ’Responsibility to Protect’, and

investigates the claim that it embodies progressive values

in international politics.

Selected Contents: Introduction Philip Cunliffe Part 1: The

Responsibility to Protect: History and Politics 2. The

Skeleton in the Closet: The Responsibility to Protect in History

Noam Chomsky 3. Understanding the Gap between the

Promise and Reality of the Responsibility to Protect David

Chandler 4. The Responsibility to Protect and the End of the

Western Century Tara McCormack Part 2: The Responsibility

to Protect: International Law and Order 5. A Dangerous

Duty: Power, Paternalism and the Global ‘Duty of Care’ Philip

Cunliffe 6. Responsibility to Peace: A Critique of R2P Mary

Ellen O’Connell 7. The Responsibility to Protect and

International Law Aidan Hehir Part 3: The Responsibility

to Protect in Africa 8. The Irresponsibility of the Responsibility

to Protect in Africa Adam Branch 9. Responsibility to Protect

or Right to Punish? Mahmood Mamdani

December 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58623-8: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83429-9

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011


Jens Bartelson, University of Copenhagen, Denmark

Series: Critical Issues in Global Politics

This book summarizes recent academic debates on

sovereignty within academic international relations and

political theory. Recent scholarship has focused on the

changing meaning of the concept of sovereignty in a

variety of historical and political contexts, and under

what conditions these changes in turn spill over into

institutional change on a global scale. This book

furnishes new insights about the current meaning

and function of the concept of sovereignty within

international relations and political theory.

June 2011: 216 x 138: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-44682-2: £70.00

Pb: 978-0-415-44683-9: £15.99

For more information, visit:



Security, Law and Borders

At the Limits of Liberties

Tugba Basaran, University of Kent, Belgium

Series: Routledge Studies in Liberty and Security

This book focuses on security practices, civil liberties and

the politics of borders in liberal democracies.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Limits of Liberal Rule

2. Borders of Liberal Rule 3. Liberties on the Territory

4. Liberties on the Seas 5. Liberties in Third Countries

6. Conclusions

September 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57025-1: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84192-1

For more information, visit:



The Contested Politics

of Mobility

Borderzones and Irregularity

Edited by Vicki Squire, Open University, UK

Series: Routledge Advances in International Relations

and Global Politics

The Contested Politics of Mobility is the first collection to

explore how the politics of mobility turns on the condition

of irregularity. Timely and incisive, it brings together

leading scholars from across the sub-disciplines of

citizenship, migration and security studies, who show

irregularity to be a produced and highly contested

socio-political condition.

Selected Contents: 1. The Contested Politics of Mobility Vicki

Squire Part 1: Politicising Mobility 2. Politicising Mobility

Vicki Squire 3. Freedom and Speed in Enlarged Borderzones

Didier Bigo 4. Rezoning the Global: Technological Zones,

Technological Work, and the (Un-) Making of Biometric

Borders William Walters 5. Borderzones of Enforcement:

Criminalization, Workplace Raids, and Migrant Counter-

Conducts Jonathan Xavier Inda 6. Alien Powers: Deportable

Labour and the Spectacle of Security Nicholas De Genova

Part 2: Mobilising Politics 7. Mobilising Politics Vicki Squire

8. Capitalism, Migration and Social Struggles: Towards a

Theory of the Autonomy of Migration Sandro Mezzadra

9. Governing Borderzones of Mobility the E-borders: The

Politics of Embodied Mobility Kim Rygiel 10. Legal Exclusion

and Dislocated Subjectivities: The Deportation of Salvadoran

Youth from the United States Susan Bibler Coutin 11. Forms

of Irregular Citizenship Peter Nyers 12. Citizens Despite

Borders: Reflections upon the Changing Territorial Order of

Europe Enrica Rigo 13. Epilogue, The Movements of Politics:

Logics, Subjects, Citizenships Engin Isin

November 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58461-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83982-9

For more information, visit:



Reimagining War in

the 21st Century

From Clausewitz to Network-Centric Warfare

Manabrata Guha, National Institute of Advanced

Studies Bangalore, India

Series: Routledge Critical Security Studies

This book interrogates the philosophical backdrop of

Clausewitzian notions of war, and asks whether modern,

network-centric militaries can still be said to serve the


Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Prelude to Clausewitz

2. Clausewitz and the Architectonic of War 3. Machining

(Network-centric) War 4. Theorizing War in the Age of

Networks 5. Concept-War. Conclusion

August 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56166-2: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84864-7

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


The New Spatiality of Security

Operational Uncertainty and the US Military

in Iraq

Caroline M. Croser, University of New South Wales

at the Australian Defence Force Academy

Series: Routledge Critical Security Studies

This book provides a rigorous critical analysis of how the

US military operates in Iraq, exploring the spatial

practices of violence.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Spatial Operation

of Violence Interlude: The (not-so-)Distant Roar of Battle

2. A Praxiography of the Battlespace 3. CPOF and the

Battlespace Multiple 4. Addressing Multiplicity in the

Event-ful City 5. From Multiplicity to Presence in Baghdad

6. The Mobile Possibility of the ‘Unit-in-CPOF’. Conclusion

September 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56522-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84203-4

For more information, visit:


Mapping Transatlantic

Security Relations

The EU, Canada and the War on Terror

Edited by Mark B. Salter, University of Ottawa,


Series: Routledge Studies in Liberty and Security

This book examines how legal, political, and rights

discourses, security policies and practices migrate and

translate across the North Atlantic.

Selected Contents: Introduction Mark B. Salter 1. Special

Delivery: The Multilateral Politics of Extraordinary Rendition

Maria Koblanck 2. Miscarriages of Justice and Exceptional

Procedures in the ’War Against Terrorism’ Emmanuel-Pierre

Guittet 3. Risk-Focused Security Politics and Human Rights:

The Impossible Symbiosis Anastasia Tsoukala 4. The North

Atlantic Field of Aviation Security Mark B. Salter 5. Tracing

Terrorists: The EU-Canada Agreement in PNR Matters Peter

Hobbing 6. The Global Governance of Data Privacy

Regulation: European Leadership and the Ratcheting Up of

Canadian Rules Abraham Newman 7. Made in the USA? The

Impact of Transatlantic Norms on the European Union’s Data

Protection Regime Patryk Pawlak 8. Norm and Expertise in

the Global Fight Against Transnational Organized Crime and

Terrorism Amandine Scherrer 9. The Accountability Gap:

Human Rights and EU External Cooperation on Criminal

Justice, Counterterrorism and the Rule of Law Susie Alegre

10. The Role of NGOs in the Access to Public Information:

Extraordinary Renditions and the Absence of Transparency

Marton Sulyok and Andras Pap 11. Replacing and Displacing

the Law: The Europeanization of Judicial Power Antione

Mégie 12. Transjudicial Conversations about Security and

Human Rights Audrey Macklin 13. A Coordinated Judicial

Response to Counterterrorism? Counterexamples Rayner

Thwaites 14. The Other Transatlantic: Practices, Policies,

Fields Mark B. Salter and Can E. Mutlu

April 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57861-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85067-1

For more information, visit:





The Routledge Handbook

of Transatlantic Security

Edited by Jussi Hanhimäki, Georges-Henri

Soutou and Basil Germond, University of Central

Lancashire, UK

This new Handbook provides

readers with the tools to

understand the evolution

of transatlantic security from

the Cold War era to the early

21st century.

The contributors address the

key questions arising from the

history of transatlantic security

relations, covering a broad

range of historical and

contemporary themes, including

the founding of NATO; the impact of the Korean War;

the role of nuclear (non-)proliferation; perspectives of

individual countries (especially France and Germany); the

impact of culture, identity and representation in shaping

post-Cold War transatlantic relations; institutional issues,

particularly EU-NATO relations; the Middle East; and the

legacy of the Cold War, notably tensions with Russia.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Transatlantic

Security in the Cold War Era 1. Three Ministers and the

World They Made: Acheson, Bevin and Schuman, and the

Making of the North Atlantic Treaty Anne Deighton 2. The

Korean War: Miscalculation and Alliance Transformation

Samuel Wells 3. The Doctrine of Massive Retaliation and

the Impossible Nuclear Defense of the Atlantic Alliance:

From MC 48 to MC 70 (1953-1959) François David

4. IVth Republic France and the Atlantic Alliance: Between

Faithfulness to the Alliance and National Interests Jenny

Raflik 5. The Fourth Republic and NATO: Loyalty to the

Alliance versus National Demands George-Henri Soutou

6. NATO Forever? Willy Brandt’s Heretical Thoughts on an

Alternative Future Benedikt Schoenborn 7. Negotiating with

the Enemy and Having Problems with the Allies: The Impact

of the Non-Proliferation Treaty on Transatlantic Relations

Leopoldo Nuti 8. Power Shifts and New Security Needs:

NATO, European Identity, and the Reorganization of the

West, 1967–75 Daniel Möckli and Andreas Wenger 9. West

Germany and the United States during the Middle East Crisis

of 1973: ’Nothing but a Semi-Colony’? Bernhard Blumenau

10. The United States and the ’Loss’ of Iran: Repercussions

on Transatlantic Barbara Zanchetta Part 2: Transatlantic

Security Beyond the Cold War 11. The Warsaw Pact,

NATO and the End of the Cold War Jérôme Elie 12. The

Road to Saint Malo: Germany and EU-NATO Relations after

the Cold War Wolfgang Krieger 13. EU-NATO Relations after

the Cold War Hanna Ojanen 14. Security of the EU

Boundaries in the Post Cold-War Era Axel Marion 15. Venus

Has Learned Geopolitics: The European Union’s Frontier and

Transatlantic Relations Basil Germond 16. The Rise and Fall

of Criticism Towards the United States in Transatlantic

Relations: From Anti-Americanism to Obamania Tuomas

Forsberg 17. Strategic Culture and Security: American

Antiterrorist Policy and the Use of Soft Power after 9/11

Jérôme Gygax 18. European Security Identity since the End

of the Cold War Guillaume de Rougé 19. A Realistic Reset

with Russia: Practical Expectations for US-Russian Relations

James Goldgeier 20. The Obama Administration and

Transatlantic Security: Problems and Prospects Jussi M.

Hanhimäki 21. Conclusion: Is the Present Future of

Transatlantic Security already History? Jean Jacques De Dardel

June 2010: 246 x 174: 336pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57283-5: £125.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84669-8

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy 9

Forthcoming in 2011


Transatlantic Relations

since 1945

An Introduction

Jussi Hanhimaki, Graduate Institute

of International Studies, Switzerland,

Benedikt Schoenborn, University of Tampere,

Finland and Barbara Zanchetta, Finnish Institute

of International Affairs

The transatlantic relationship has been the bedrock of

international relations since the end of World War II. This

new textbook, structured chronologically, focuses on the

period since 1945 and is built around three key themes:

• Security: From the Cold War to the War on Terror

• Economics: Integration and Competition

• ‘Soft Power’ and Transatlantic Relations.

This book, the first comprehensive account of

transatlantic relations in the second half of the twentieth

century (extending to the present day), will be of great

interest to students of transatlantic relations, NATO, US

Foreign Policy, Cold War History, European History and

IR/International history.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. American Commitment to

Europe, 1945–1949 2. Institutional Frameworks, 1949–1957

3. Tension and Coexistence, 1957–1961 4. Challenged

America, 1961–1972 5. Transatlantic Discord, 1973–1984

6. The Wall Comes Down, 1985–1989 7. Transitions and

Uncertainties, 1989–1995 8. Enlargement, Integration, and

Globalization, 1995–2001 9. A New Order, 2001–2009.

Epilogue. Bibliography

May 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48697-2: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-48698-9: £22.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The Peace In Between

Post-Conflict Violence and Peacebuilding

Edited by Mats Berdal, King’s College London, UK

and Astri Suhrke, Chr. Michelsen Institute, Bergen,


Series: Conflict, Development and Peacebuilding

This volume examines the causes and purposes of

post-conflict violence in contemporary intra-state wars.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Four Ideal-Types of

Post-War Peace Astri Suhrke Part 1: Two Historical Cases

2. Post-war Violence after the Spanish Civil Michael Richards

3. Violence in the ex-Confederacy US States during

Reconstruction Michael Beaton Part 2: Europe and the

Middle East 4. Bosnia after the Dayton Accord Mats Berdal,

Gemma Collantes and Merima Zupcevic 5. Kosovo: Violence

Against the Serbs in the Immediate Post-War Environment

Michael Boyle 6. Political Violence in Lebanon after the Civil

War in 1989 Are Knudsen and Nasser Yasin Part 3: Asia

7. ‘Armed Politics’ in Afghanistan Antonio Giustozzi

8. Afghan Warlords in the post-Conflict Period Kristian Berg

Harpviken 9. Cambodia and Hegemonic-Party Politics

Sorpong Peu 10. Post-Independence Violence in Timor Leste

Dionisio Babo Soares Part 4: Sub-Sahara Africa 11. The

Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) and Post-War Violence

Ingrid Samset 12. Ex-Combatants in Post-war Liberia Torunn

Wimpelmann Chaudhary 13. Post-1994 Rwanda Trine Eide

14. Guatemala and ‘The Memory of Violence’ John-Andrew

McNeish and Oscar Lopez Rivera 15. Conclusion Mats Berdal

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60932-6: £75.00

For more information, visit:



iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy

Contemporary Security Studies

Series edited by James Gow, King’s

College London, University of London,

UK and Rachel Kerr

This series focuses on new research across

the spectrum of international peace and

security, in an era where each year throws

up multiple examples of conflicts that

present new security challenges in the

world around them.

Global Biosecurity

Threats and Responses

Edited by Peter Katona, UCLA, USA, John P. Sullivan,

National Terrorism Early Warning Resource Center,

Los Angeles Sheriff’s Department, USA and

Michael D. Intriligator, UCLA, USA

This book explores a range of biohealth and biosecurity

threats, places them in context, and offers responses and

solutions from global and local, networked and pyramidal,

as well as specialized and interdisciplinary perspectives.

Selected Contents: Preface. Reflections of an Old

Bioweaponeer William Patrick III. Introduction: Global

Biosecurity and the Spectrum of Infectious Disease Threats

Peter Katona, John P. Sullivan and Michael D. Intriligator

Part 1: Assessing the Threats of Natural and Deliberate

Epidemics 1. Emerging and Re-emerging Infectious

Diseases Peter Katona and W. Michael Scheld 2. Biological

Warfare and Bioterrorism: How Do They Differ from Other

WMD Threats Philip Coyle 3. A History of Bioterrorism and

Biocrimes Peter Katona and Seth Carus 4. Food and

Agricultural Biosecurity Tom Frazier 5. The Economic,

Political, and Social Impacts of Bioterrorism Michael D.

Intriligator 6. Technology and the Global Proliferation of

Dual-Use Biotechnologies Mark Gorwitz 7. Conflict and

Environmental Security Setting the Stage for Humanitarian

Crises John P. Sullivan Part 2: Gaps and Weaknesses in

Current Public Health Preparedness and Response

Systems 8. Problems in Coordinating Health, Law

Enforcement and Intelligence Activities in the U.S. and

Europe Stefan Brem and Stéphane Dubois 9. Emerging

Roles of Reserve Forces: National Guard Role and Mission

in Domestic Preparedness Annette L. Sobel 10. Mitigating

Crisis Through Communication Dan Rutz Part 3: Integrated

Approaches to Infectious-Disease Preparedness and

Response 11a. Bioterrorism Surveillance Manfred Green

11b. The Role of Informal Information Sources as an Adjunct

to Routine Disease Surveillance Majorie Pollack 12. A Public

Health Model for WMD Threat Assessment: Connecting the

Bioterrorism Dots on the Local Level Dickson Diamond and

Moon Kim 13. Integrating Local, State, and Federal Responses

to Infectious Threat Jonathan E. Fielding, Elan Shultz, Noel

Bazini-Barakat, Deborah Davenport, Jon Freedman, Robert

Mosby and Robert Ragland 14. Vulnerable Populations in

Disaster Planning: Children are Different Jeffrey S. Upperman

15. Developing a New Paradigm for Biodefense in the 21st

Century: Adapting our Healthcare Response to the Biodisaster

Threat Joseph Rosen and C. Everett Koop 16. Biosecurity

Neil Jacobstein 17. Towards a Global Ius Pestilentiae: The

Functions of Law in Global Biosecurity David P. Fidler.

Conclusion: An Integrated, Networked Approach to Infectious

Disease Preparedness Peter Katona, John P. Sullivan and

Michael D. Intriligator Epilogue: Reflections on the Future

of Bioweapons Alvin Toffler

January 2010: 234 x 156: 352pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46053-8: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86024-3

For more information, visit:



International Justice

after Conflict

Outreach, Legacy and Accountability

Jessica Lincoln

This book critically examines the role of outreach

within the application of international justice in

post-conflict settings.

The assumption that justice brings peace underpins much

of the thinking, and indeed action, of international justice,

yet little is known about whether this is actually the case.

Significant questions surrounding the link between peace

and justice remain: do trials deter would-be war criminals;

is justice possible for the most heinous crimes; can

international justice replace local justice? This book

explores these questions in relation to recent developments

in international justice that have both informed and

shaped the creation of the hybrid tribunal in Sierra

Leone. Few empirical studies examine how justice

contributes to peace and within these instances, how

the complexity of international justice mechanisms have

been communicated to their respective audiences in order

to foment wide-spread knowledge and understanding of

the processes. This book addresses this deficit by testing

these assumptions on the ground in a post-conflict

setting in West Africa.

This book will be of much interest to students of

transitional justice, war crimes, peace and conflict studies,

human rights, international law, and IR in general.

December 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59839-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Legitimacy and the

Use of Armed Force

Stability Missions in the Post-Cold War Era

Chiyuki Aoi, Aoyama Gakuin University, Tokyo, Japan

This book examines the notion of the legitimacy of the

use of force in stability operations, specifying conditions

under which intervention is most likely to occur and may

be justified.

Selected Contents: 1. Legitimacy in Stability Operations

2. Liberia: Creating Peace in Africa 3. Bosnia-Herzegovina:

From Peace Support to Coercive Diplomacy 4. Somalia: From

Peace Enforcement to Disengagement 5. Rwanda: Failure to

Stop Genocide 6. Iraq: From Preemption to Counterinsurgency

7. Iraq: Transformation Failure and Intervention Performance

8. Iraq: Non-Support of Preemptive War 9. Afghanistan: From

Self-Defence to State-Building 10. Afghanistan: Stabilisation

and Counterinsurgency Performance 11. Afghanistan: From

Adequate to Dwindling Support 12. Legitimacy and the

Conditions of Success

September 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55954-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86576-7

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Multipolarity in

the 21st Century

A New World Order

Edited by Donette Murray and David Brown, both

at Royal Military Academy, Sandhurst, Camberley, UK

This book seeks to help shape the debate surrounding

power and polarity in the twenty-first century both by

assessing the likelihood of US decline and by analysing

what each of the so-called ’rising powers’ can do.

Selected Contents: Introduction Donette Murray 1. The

American Eagle Rob Singh 2. The Chinese Dragon Donette

Murray 3. The Russian Bear Dmitri Polikanov 4. The Indian

Tiger Sumit Ganguly and Manjeet S. Pardesi 5. The EU: A

Different Kind of Beast? John McCormick. Conclusion: A

New World Order – An Emerging Multipolar Framework?

David Brown

April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47547-1: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Territory, War, and Peace

John A. Vasquez and Marie T. Henehan, both at

University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, USA

This book presents a collection

of new and updated essays on

what has come to be known as

the territorial explanation of war.

The book argues that a key

both to peace and to war lies in

understanding the role territory

plays as a source of conflict and

inter-group violence. Of all the

issues that spark conflict,

territorial disputes have the

highest probability of escalating

to war. War, however, is hardly inevitable; much depends

on how territorial issues are handled. More importantly,

settling territorial disputes and establishing mutually

recognized boundaries can produce long periods of

peace between neighbors, even if other salient issues

arise. While territory is not the only cause of war and

wars arise from other issues, territory is one of the main

causes of war, and learning how to manage it, can, in

principle, eliminate an entire class of wars.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Theory 1. Why Do Neighbors

Fight? Proximity, Interactions, or Territoriality John A. Vasquez

2. Distinguishing Rivals That Go To War from Those That Do

Not: A Quantitative Comparative Case Study of the Two

Paths to War John A. Vasquez Part 2: Territory and War

3. Territorial Disputes and the Probability of War, 1816-1992

John A. Vasquez and Marie T. Henehan 4. Mapping the

Probability of War: The Role of Territorial Disputes Compared

to the Role of Contiguity John A. Vasquez 5. The Effect of

Territory on Dispute Escalation among Initiators Marie T.

Henehan 6. The Probability of War, 1816-1992 John A.

Vasquez Part 3: Identifying Paths to War 7. Territorial

Paths to War: Their Probability of Escalation, 1816-2001 John

A. Vasquez 8. Paths to War: The Territorial Origins of War

John A. Vasquez Part 4: Territory and Peace 9. The

Changing Probability of Interstate War, 1816-1992 Marie T.

Henehan and John A. Vasquez 10. Peace, Globalization, and

Territoriality John A. Vasquez and Marie T. Henehan

Part 5: Conclusion 11. The Significance of Territory

John A. Vasquez

July 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-42413-4: £95.00

Pb: 978-0-415-42414-1: £24.99

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Private Security Contractors

and New Wars

Risk, Law, and Ethics

Kateri Carmola, Middlebury College, Vermont, USA

This book addresses the ambiguities of the growing use

of private security contractors and provides guidance as

to how our expectations about regulating this expanding

‘service’ industry will have to be adjusted.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Complex Identity

of the PMSC 2. The Multifaceted Origins of the PMSC

Industry 3. Contracting and Danger in the Risk Society

4. PMSCs and the Clash of Legal Cultures 5. Frontier Ethics.

Epilogue: Recommendations

January 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77171-9: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85689-5

For more information, visit:


US Hegemony and

International Legitimacy

Norms, Power and Followership in

the Wars on Iraq

Lavina Rajendram Lee, Macquarie University, Australia

This book examines US hegemony and international

legitimacy in the post-Cold War era, focusing on its

leadership in the two wars on Iraq.

Selected Contents: Acknowledgments 1. Introduction

and Theoretical Framework 2. Legitimacy and Followership

in the Gulf Crisis 3. Material Interests and Followership in

the Gulf Crisis 4. Legitimacy and Followership in the Iraq

Crisis 5. Material Interests and Followership in the Iraq Crisis

6. Comparative Analysis and Theoretical Implications

7. Conclusion

January 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55236-3: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85949-0

For more information, visit:


Rethinking Security


The Problem of Unintended Consequences

Edited by Christopher Daase and

Cornelius Friesendorf, both at Goethe

University, Frankfurt, Germany

This book explores the unintended consequences of

security governance actions and explores how their

effects can be limited.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Security Governance and

the Problem of Unintended Consequences Christopher Daase

and Cornelius Friesendorf 1. Strengthening Autocracy: The

World Bank and Social Reform in Egypt Florian Kohstall

2. Security Governance, Complex Peace Support Operations

and the Blurring of Civil-Military Tasks Susan E. Penksa

3. Unintended Consequences of International Statebuilding

Ulrich Schneckener 4. Unintended Consequences of

International Security Assistance: Doing More Harm than

Good? Ursula C. Schroeder 5. Unintended Criminalizing

Consequences of Sanctions: Lessons from the Balkans Peter

Andreas 6. Unintended Consequences of Measures to

Counter the Financing of Terrorism Thomas J. Biersteker

7. Neither Seen Nor Heard: The Unintended Consequences

of Counter-Trafficking and Counter-Smuggling Benjamin S.

Buckland 8. Unintended Consequences of Targeted Sanctions

Mikael Eriksson 9. The Privatization of Force and its

Consequences: Unintended but not Unpredictable Jörg

Friedrichs. Conclusion: Analyzing and Avoiding Unintended

Consequences of Security Governance Cornelius Friesendorf

and Christopher Daase

April 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48535-7: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85115-9

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Understanding NATO

in the 21st Century

Alliance Strategies, Security and Global


Edited by Graeme P. Herd, Geneva Centre for

Security Policy, Switzerland and John Kriendler,

George C. Marshall European Center for Security

Studies, Germany

This volume provides an overview of the evolution of

NATO, alliances and global security governance in the

twenty-first century.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: NATO 20/20 2. NATO

Transformation 3. Crisis Response Operations 4. NATO’s

Role in Combating International Terrorists 5. NATO

Enlargement 6. NATO Partnerships 7. NATO and Mutually

Supporting Institutions 8. NATO HQ Reform 9. NATO’s

Future: 2020 Alternative Scenarios

April 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43633-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy 11

Forthcoming in 2011

War, Ethics and Justice

International Security in a Post-9/11 World

Edited by Mark Phythian and Annika Bergman-

Rosamond, both at University of Leicester, UK

This edited volume addresses the key issues of ethics,

war and international relations in the post-9/11 world.

Selected Contents: Introduction: War, Ethics and Justice

in a Post-9/11 World Annika Bergman-Rosamond and Mark

Phythian 1. Tactics of Mistake: Torture, History and the Ethics

of Liberal Wars After 9/11 Caroline Kennedy-Pipe 2. Ethics

and the British Military: The Dilemmas and Demands of the

‘War on Terror’ Wyn Rees 3. An Australian Approach to

Ethical Warfare? Australia and the ‘War on Terror’ Thomas

Moore 4. The Internationalisation of Swedish Military Policy:

Political Economy and Ethical Legitimisation Annika

Bergman-Rosamond 5. Symbolics of Power and the

Return of the Sacrificial Soldier to Canadian Soil Tina

Managhan 6. Warrior Diplomats: Locating Gender and

Power in the ‘War on Terror’ Annika Bergman-Rosamond

and Thomas Moore 7. Do Forces for Good contain Real Men?

Military Masculinities in the British Army on Operations Other

Than War Claire Duncanson 8. Ethics, Gender and Intelligence

in the ‘War on Terror’ Cynthia Enloe 9. Intelligence Ethics – An

Oxymoron? Mark Phythian 10. Intelligence Ethics in the War

against Terrorism: The Case of Israel Shlomo Shapiro

11. ‘Burning a Path to Peace’? War, Ethics and Justice in the

Israel-Palestine Conflict Adrian Hyde-Price 12. The ‘War on

Terror’: Intelligence, Ethics, and Justice in Pakistan and

Afghanistan Rob Johnson. Conclusion: Towards a Global

Ethics in an Age of Terror? Prospects and Challenges

Mark Phythian

January 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55234-9: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86852-2

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Law, Ethics and Security

Policy Challenges in the post-911 World

Edited by Aidan Hehir, University of Westminster,

UK, Natasha Kuhrt, King’s College London, UK and

Andrew Mumford, University of Hull, UK

This volume explores the nexus of the issues of

international law and ethics in the context of the ’War

on Terror’, and the misalignment of contemporary

security demands with existing law.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Andy Mumford and

Natasha Kuhrt Part 1: Framing the Issue 2. Terrorism,

Security and International Law Nigel White 3. Terrorism or

Insurgency? Al Qaeda’s Networked Threat and the State

Response Andy Mumford 4. Self-Defence in a New Era

James Gow Part 2: International Law and Security

5. Who Killed the Right to Self-Defence? Thomas Jones

6. Computer Network Attacks, Self-Defence and International

Law Elaine Korzak 7. The Nexus of Self-Determination and

Security in a Time of Terror: Implications for Humanitarian

Intervention Natasha Kuhrt 8. Law and War in a Time of

Terror? Rachel Kerr and James Gow Part 3: Self Defence

9. In the Shadow of Guantanamo Bay: Judicial Responses to

the ‘War on Terror’ Emma MacClean 10. Security, Discretion

and International Law Aidan Hehir 11. Conclusion Aidan Hehir

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60742-1: £75.00

For more information, visit:




iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy

Defending Democracy

and Securing Diversity

Edited by Christian Leuprecht, Royal Military

College of Canada

Starting with the premise that population change at

home and abroad is among the greatest security and

defence challenges of the twenty-first century, this book

draws on theory and practice to exemplify means by

which diversity is a key asset to defence and security.

Selected Contents: 1. Introductory Note Christian Leuprecht

2. Rethinking Diversity and Security Alan Okros 3. Evolution

of Policing and Security: Implications for Diverse Security

Sectors David Last 4. Evolving UK Policy on Diversity in the

Armed Services: Multiculturalism and its Discontents David

Mason and Christopher Dandeker 5. Harnessing Social

Diversity in the British Armed Forces: The Limitations of

‘Management’ Approaches Victoria Marie Basham 6. Sex,

Gender and Cultural Intelligence in the Canadian Forces

Karen D. Davis 7. Ethnic Cultural Minorities and their Interest

in a Job in the Royal Dutch Army Jelle van den Berg and Rudy

Richardson 8. Can Women Make a Difference? Female

Peacekeepers in Bosnia and Kosovo Liora Sion 9. Diversity

in the Canadian Forces: Lessons from Afghanistan Anne

Irwin 10. Ethnic Diversity and Police–Community Relations

in Guyana Joan Mars 11. The Politics of Race and Gender in

the South African Armed Forces: Issues, Challenges, Lessons

Lindy Heinecken and Noelle van der Waag-Cowling 12. Gender

Mainstreaming: Lessons for Diversity Donna Winslow

13. Diversity as Strategy: Democracy’s Ultimate Litmus

Test Christian Leuprecht

July 2010: 216 x 138: 260pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57649-9: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

International Security & Peace


Origins & Evolution

J. David Singer, University of Michigan, USA

Edited by Jody Lear, Merideth Reid Sarkees

and Diane Macaulay

Professor J. David Singer has

been arguably the most

important influence on

quantitative research into the

causes and attributes of war.

This collection is a carefully

selected overview of his work

which provides not only an

excellent introduction to his

considerable methodological,

theoretical and empirical

contributions but also an

intellectual history of developments in the field of

international relations which are reflected in Professor

Singer’s work.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Making of a Peace

Researcher 2. Earlier Evaluations of National Security Policy

3. Public Dove but Policy Wonk 4. Querulous and Suggestive

Interventions 5. Conceptual and Methodological Insights

6. From Conventional Concepts to Operational Indicators

7. Scientific Research Payoffs 8. Sermons for the Next


February 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77959-3: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77960-9: £25.99

For more information, visit:


New International Relations

Series edited by Richard Little,

University of Bristol, UK, Iver B.

Neumann, NUPI Norwegian Institute of

International Affairs, Norway and Jutta

Weldes, University of Bristol, UK

The field of international relations has

changed dramatically in recent years. This

series covers the major issues that have

emerged and reflects the latest academic

thinking in this particularly dynamic arena.


Constructing Global Enemies

Hegemony and Identity in International

Discourses on Terrorism and Drug


Eva Herschinger, Universitaet der Bundeswehr

Munich, Germany

Examines efforts to counteract terrorism at the

international level and drug prohibition policies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. On Hegemony and

Identity in International Security Discourses 3. Opening the

‘Black Box’: The Construction of International Hegemonies

4. International Drug Prohibition: Constructing the

‘Drug-Free World’ 5. Writing the ‘War on Terror’: The

Struggle of Hegemonic Projects 6. Comparing the ‘War on

Drugs’ and the ‘War on Terror’ 7. Conclusion. Appendix

November 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59685-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83638-5

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Non-Great Powers in

International Politics

The English School and Nordic


Annika Bergman-Rosamond, University of

Leicester, UK

This book develops a theoretical framework drawn from

the English School of international theory to explore the

contribution of non-great powers within the

international society of states. In doing so the author

asks whether the analysis of such actors, as well as their

distinct contributions to global justice and order, can

sustain the normative and analytical rigour of the English


Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Revising the

English School 3. Non-Great Powers in International Society

4. Nordic Welfare Internationalism as a Form of Solidarism

5. Humanitarian (Forcible) Intervention and the Limits of

Solidarist Arguments 6. Gendered Internationalism and the

English School 7. Adjacent Internationalism 8. Conclusion

March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46179-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

NATO’s Security Discourse

After the Cold War

Representing the West

Andreas Behnke, University of Reading, UK

This book provides is a critical investigation into the

discursive processes through which the North Atlantic

Treaty Organisation (NATO) reproduced a geopolitical

order after the end of the Cold War and the demise of

its constitutive enemy, the Soviet Union.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. On Methodology:

From Space to Spatialisation 3. Space and Identity in IR

Theory 4. Reading/Writing NATO 5. Mapping the Post-Cold

War Order: From the London Declaration to the Strategic

Concept 6. The ‘Home-Coming’: NATO and the Central and

Eastern European States 7. From ‘Pangolin’ to ‘Partner’: The

Construction of Russia in NATO’s Discourse 8. ’Arc of

Tension and Crisis’: The South and the Mediterranean

9. ‘Out of Area or Out of Business’ – Bosnia and the

Deconstruction of NATO 10. NATO Unlimited – The

Washington Summit 1999 11. Conclusion. Bibliography

March 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58453-1: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


War and Ideas

Selected Essays

John Mueller, Ohio State University, USA

Mueller has maintained that war

(and peace) are, in essence,

merely ideas, and that war has

waned as the notion that

’peace’ is a decidedly good idea

has gained currency. The first

part of the book updates this

argument, and assesses and

critiques more recent theories

arguing that this phenomenon is

caused by the rising acceptance

of democracy and/or capitalism.

The second part updates his argument that the Cold

War was at base a clash of ideas that were seen to be

threatening, not of arms balances, domestic systems,

geography, or international structure.

The third section deals with the role public opinion plays

in foreign policy, and argues that many earlier conclusions

about opinion during the Korean and Vietnam Wars apply

to more recent military ventures in the Persian Gulf,

Bosnia, Iraq, and Afghanistan. The final part focuses on

the conduct of war itself, particularly on evaluations of

the enemy, and argues that much of what has been called

’ethnic’ warfare has been more criminal in nature.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: War, Ideas, and

Peace 1. War Has Almost Ceased to Exist: An Assessment

2. Faulty Correlation, Foolish Consistency, and Fatal

Consequence: Democracy, Peace, and Theory in the Middle

East 3. Capitalism, Peace, and the Historical Movement of

Ideas Part 2: Threat Perception, Ideas, and Foreign

Policy 4. What Was the Cold War About? Evidence from Its

Ending 5. Simplicity and Spook: Terrorism and the Dynamics

of Threat Exaggeration 6. Questing for Monsters to Destroy:

11/9 as 9/2 and 9/11 as 6/25 7. Why Isn’t There More

Violence? Part 3: Public Opinion, Foreign Policy, and

War 8. American Foreign Policy and Public Opinion in a New

Era: Eleven Propositions 9. The Iraq War and the

Management of American Public Opinion Part 4: Ideas

about the Enemy: The Conduct of Modern War 10. The

Search for the ’Breaking Point’ in Vietnam: The Statistics of a

Deadly Quarrel 11. The Perfect Enemy: Assessing the Gulf

War 12. The Banality of ’Ethnic War’. Bibliography

December 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78176-3: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-78177-0: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Statebuilding, Security-Sector

Reform and the Liberal Peace

The Freedom of Security

Barry Ryan, University of Keele, UK

Series: Routledge Studies in Intervention and Statebuilding

This book contextualises the rapid growth of Security

Sector Reform (SSR) in state-building, and provides a

critique of the liberal peace theories that lay behind it.

Selected Contents: 1. The Freedom of Security 2. Security

Sector Reform and Statebuilding 3. The Logos of a Liberal

Peace 4. The European Security Strategy and SSR 5. Bilateral

Actors in SSR 6. Democratization and SSR 7. Socioeconomic

Development and SSR 8. The Logos of Liberal

War. Bibliography

March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55833-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86774-7

For more information, visit:


Security and Governance

Series edited by Fiona B. Adamson,

School of Oriental and African Studies,

UK, Roland Paris, University of Ottawa,

Canada and Stefan Wolff, University of

Birmingham, UK

This series publishes high quality original

research that reflects broadening

conceptions of security and the growing

nexus between the study of governance

issues and security issues. Titles in the

series meet the highest academic

standards, and is at the cutting edge of

debates taking place at the intersection of

security studies and governance studies.

Emerging Transnational (In)

security Governance

A Statist-Transnationalist Approach

Edited by Ersel Aydinli, Bilkent University, Turkey

‘Emerging Transnational

(In)security Governance

provides a significant

contribution to the social

science literatures on

terrorism, transnational

organised crime, security

governance, and the nexus

between these topics. Written

by a team of subject experts

and edited by a highly

respected scholar, Ersel

Aydinli, the chapters in

this study deliver thought-provoking and rigorous

analysis of the current landscape of and future

prospects for transnational security governance.

The great strength of the study is that it relates

existing mechanisms designed to facilitate

domestic and transnational cooperation in the

fight against crime to the urgent task of countering

the threat of transnational terrorism. This is valuable

reading for students and researchers of terrorism

and transnational governance.‘ – Alex Braithwaite,

University College London, United Kingdom

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Two Worlds at

War: The International vs. the Transnational 2. Statist

Transnationalism for a Security Cooperation Regime Ersel Aydinli

Part 2: Visions for Transnational Intelligence Cooperation:

Challenges and Prospects 3. Beyond the State: The Impact

of Transnational Terrorist Threats on Security and Intelligence

Cooperation Derek Reveron 4. Intelligence Sharing and United

States Counter-Terrorism Policy James I. Walsh 5. Rendition in

a Transnational Insecurity Environment Peter Gill Part 3:

Pioneers of Post-International Security Governance

6. Is the UK Stepping Towards Transnationalization? The Serious

Organised Crime Agency Glen Segell 7. Structure and Agency

in Transnational Cooperation in the Fields of Security Otwin

Marenin 8. Police Liaisons as Builders of Transnational Security

Cooperation Hasan Yon 9. First Preventers: The Necessity

of Globalizing and Localizing Counter-Terrorism Intelligence

Sharing Brian Nussbaum 10. Police and Counter-Terrorism:

A Sociological Theory of International Cooperation Mathieu

Deflem 11. Adaptive States and the New Transnational Security

Regime Ersel Aydinli

February 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56360-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85745-8

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy 13

Forthcoming in 2011

Power and Progress

International Politics in Transition

Jack Snyder, Columbia University, USA

Series: Security and Governance

Jack Snyder is a leading

American International

Relations scholar who has

developed an international

reputation for his research on

IR theory and US Foreign policy.

This book draws together many

of his essays to explore a liberal

realist theory of international

politics. It tackles the question

of change in a heterogeneous,

incompletely modern

international system from a

perspective that draws on realism in stressing pragmatism

in tactics and on liberalism in defining the ultimate goals

of change. The book features a new introduction that

explains the general themes that unify the prescriptive

articles on international justice, the marketplace of ideas,

and democratization.

This fascinating and must-have collection will be of

interest to students and scholars of international

relations, especially those interested in the debates on

liberalism and realism, and comparative politics.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Anarchy and Its Effects

2. Chain Gangs and Passed Bucks with Thomas Christensen

3. Averting Anarchy in the New Europe 4. Civil War and the

Security Dilemma with Robert Jervis 5. Anarchy and Culture

The Challenges of Democratic Transition 6. Turbulent

Transitions: Why Emerging Democracies Go to War with

Edward Mansfield 7. Nationalism and the Marketplace of

Ideas with Karen Ballentine 8. Democratization and Civil

War, with Edward Mansfield 9. Russian Backwardness and

the Future of Europe Empire and the Promotion of a

Liberal Order 10. Myths of Empire and Strategies of

Hegemony 11. Trials and Errors: Principles and Pragmatism

in International Justice, with Leslie Vinjamuri 12. Conclusion

January 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57572-0: £70.00

Pb: 978-0-415-57573-7: £17.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The Securitization of Migration

in the Post-Cold War Era

A Study of Movement and Order

Philippe Bourbeau, University of Ottawa, Canada

Series: Security and Governance

Provides an overview of the integration of migration into

international security frameworks emphasizing policing

and defence.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Developing

an Analytical Framework 1. Securitized Migration

2. Constructivism, Security and the Movement of People

Part 2: The Securitization of Migration in Canad and

France 3. Political Agents and theor Security Speech Acts

4. Media, Migration and Security: An Obvious Link?

5. Contextual Factors 6. Conclusion

January 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59451-6: £75.00

For more information, visit:



iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy

Routledge Global Security


Series edited by Aaron Karp and

Regina Karp, both at Old Dominion

University, Norfolk, USA

Global Security Studies is a series for

cutting-edge monographs and books on

international security. It emphasizes

cutting-edge scholarship on the forces

reshaping global security and the

dilemmas facing decision-makers the

world over. The series stresses security

issues relevant in many countries and

regions, accessible to broad professional

and academic audiences as well as to

students, and enduring through explicit

theoretical foundations.

Forthcoming in 2011

Unipolarity and World Politics

A Theory and its Implications

Birthe Hansen, University of Copenhagen, Denmark

This new book offers a coherent model of a unipolar

world order.

Selected Contents: 1. What is Unipolarity? 2. Unipolarity

and Balancing 3. The System 4. International Management

5. Management Challenges and the Structure 6. The World

Order 7. The Distinctiveness of the Unipolar World Order

January 2011: 234 x 156: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47820-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Regional Powers and Security


A Theoretical Framework

Derrick Frazier, University of Illinois, Urbana-

Champaign, USA and Robert Stewart-Ingersoll,

Grand Valley State University, USA

This book provides a coherent new theoretical

framework for understanding regional security orders

and the behaviour of states within them.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction to the Regional

Powers and Security Framework 2. Regional Security

Orders 3. Regional Structures and Regional Power

Capabilities 4. Regional Leadership 5. Regional

Custodianship 6. Regional Protection 7. Status Quo vs.

Revisionist Orientations 8. Unilateralist vs. Multilateralist

Orientations 9. Proactive vs. Reactive Orientations

10. Incorporating the Global System Level. Conclusion.


July 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56919-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


The Globalization of NATO

Intervention, Security and Identity

Veronica M. Kitchen, University of Waterloo,


This book examines NATO’s transition from a Cold War

mutual defence organization into a global alliance, and

puts the recent crisis over the Afghanistan mission in the

context of long-standing debates over out-of-area


Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Identity, Security, and

Political Talk 2. The Suez Crisis: Establishing the Out-of-Area

Norm 3. The Cold War Community and the Vietnam War

4. Changing Notions of Security and the Intervention in

Bosnia 5. September 11th and the Dispute over Iraq 6. The

Post-9/11 Alliance and Changing Notions of Mutual Defence

in Afghanistan. Conclusion: A New Strategic Concept and

New Norms?

April 2010: 234 x 156: 176pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57017-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84948-4

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Disarmament Diplomacy

and Human Security

Regimes, Norms and Moral Progress in

International Relations

Denise Garcia, Northeastern University, Boston, USA

This book assesses the evolution of normative regimes

on the international arms trade, one of the largest

threats to human security worldwide.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Norms: Progress and

Evolution in the Conduct of International Affairs 2. The

Arms Trade Treaty 3. The Small Arms and Light Weapons

Regime and the Geneva Declaration on Armed Violence

4. Banning Cluster Munitions. Conclusions. Bibliography

January 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58003-8: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The Politics of Nuclear


A Diversionary Peace Theory of Non-


Sung-Ju Cho, University of Virginia, USA

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This book theorises why states, such as Brazil and South

Africa, which could easily have become nuclear-weapon

states, chose instead to reverse their courses and

renounce nuclear weapons.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. A Diversionary Peace

Hypothesis 2. South Africa’s Metamorphosis 3. Argentina

and Brazil: Cooperation between Rivals for Nuclear

Autonomy 4. South Korea’s Insecurity under a U.S. Nuclear

Umbrella 5. The Deviant Path toward Proliferation: Why

Diversionary-Peace Had Not Occurred in India 6. Conclusions:

Findings, Implications, and Future Study. Bibliography

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58625-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Causes and Consequences of

Nuclear Proliferation

A Quantitative-Analysis Approach

Edited by Robert Rauchhaus, University of California,

Santa Barbara, USA, Matthew Kroenig, Georgetown

University, Washington DC, USA and Erik Gartzke,

University of California, San Diego, USA

This edited volume offers a systematic account of the

process of nuclear proliferation and its consequences,

using quantitative research methods.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. A Strategic

Approach to Nuclear Proliferation Erik Gartzke, Matthew

Kroenig and Robert Rauchhaus Part 2: The Causes of

Nuclear Proliferation 2. Why Delegate for Non-

Proliferation? Explaining International Cooperation through

the International Atomic Energy Agency Robert Brown

3. Membership Has Its Privileges: Conventional Arms and

Influence within the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty Jennifer

Erickson and Christopher Way 4. Importing the Bomb: Sensitive

Nuclear Assistance and Nuclear Proliferation Matthew

Kroenig 5. Taking a Walk on the Supply-Side: The Determinants

of Civilian Nuclear Cooperation Matthew Fuhrmann 6. Nuclear

Politics: The Political Decision to Acquire, Sustain or Discard

a Nuclear Arsenal James Wirtz 7. A Bargaining Model of

Nuclear Weapons Development and Disarmament Brett V.

Benson and Quan Wen Part 3: The Consequences of

Nuclear Proliferation 8. Bargaining, Nuclear Proliferation,

and Interstate Disputes Erik Gartzke and Dong-Joon Jo

9. The Spread of Nuclear Weapons and International

Conflict: Does Experience Matter? Michael Horowitz

10. Evaluating the Nuclear Peace Hypothesis: A Quantitative

Approach Robert Rauchhaus 11. Winning with the Bomb

Kyle Beardsley and Victor Asal 12. Risk Analysis of Nuclear

Deterrence Martin Hellman 13. Nuclear Disarmament:

Can Risk Analysis Inform the Debate? Paul Nelson

Part 4: Conclusion 14. The Perils of Predicting Proliferation

Alexander Montgomery and Scott Sagan. Bibliography

December 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59833-0: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Nuclear Disarmament and


Towards a Nuclear-Weapon Free World

Sverre Lodgaard, Norwegian Institute of

International Affairs, Oslo, Norway

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This book examines the current debate on nuclear

non-proliferation and disarmament, notably the

international non-proliferation regime and how to

implement its disarmament provisions.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Power Shifts and Nuclear

Weapons 1. Power Shifts and Nuclear Weapons Part 2:

The Legacies of Nuclear History and the Requirements

of a New Consensus on Non-proliferation and

Disarmament 2. The First Nuclear Era 3. Post Cold War

Doctrines 4. A Global Consensus on Non-Proliferation and

Disarmament Part 3: Proliferation Problems and the

Role of Nuclear Disarmament 5. The Three-State Problem

6. Rollback Experiences 7. The Case of Iran 8. How to

Understand North Korea 9. The Relationship Between

Disarmament and Non-Proliferation Part 4: Towards a

Nuclear-Weapon-Free World 10. Towards a Nuclear-

Weapon-Free World

September 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58634-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84259-1

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


Nuclear Proliferation and

International Order

Challenges to the Non-Proliferation Treaty

Edited by Olav Njølstad, Norwegian Nobel Institute,

Oslo, Norway

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This book examines the state of the nuclear nonproliferation

regime and the issues it faces in the early

21st century.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Present Nuclear

Order, How it Came About, Why it May Not Last Hans Blix

Part 1: Challenge from Outside: The Problem of

Non-Legal Nuclear Weapon States 2. The Indian Nuclear

Program: Motivations, Effects, and Future Trajectories S. Paul

Kapur 3. Pakistan’s Nuclear Weapons Programme: Past and

Future Bhumitra Chakma 4. Israel’s Nuclear Capability:

Implications on Middle East Security Mohamed Kadry Said

Part 2: Challenge from Within: The NPT Defectors

5. How to bring North Korea back into the NPT Leon V. Sigal

6. Challenge from Within: The Case of Iran Sverre Lodgaard

Part 3: Challenge from Below: Nuclear Trafficking and

Terrorism 7. The Threat of Nuclear Terrorism Morten Bremer

Mærli 8. The Atomic Terrorist? John Mueller

Part 4: Challenge from Above: The Unfulfilled Nuclear

Disarmament Pledge of the Five Legal Nuclear-Weapon

States 9. The United States and the NPT ’Double Bargain’

David Holloway 10. The Nuclear Policy of Russia and the

Perspectives for Nuclear Disarmament Vladimir Dvorkin

11. Creating ’Nuclear Order’: An Open-Ended Process Sergey

Oznobishchev 12. The UK, Responsible Nuclear Sovereignty

and the Disarmament Threshold William Walker 13. France

and Nuclear Non-Proliferation: From Benign Neglect to Active

Promotion Bruno Tertrais 14. Departing Revolution: China’s

Changing Nuclear Policies during the Cold War Chen Jian

15. China’s Policy on Nuclear Weapons and Disarmament

Yao Yunzhu

July 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58098-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84482-3

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

A Perpetual Menace

Nuclear Weapons and International Order

William Walker, University of St. Andrews, UK

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

Written by a leading scholar in the field of nuclear

weapons and international relations, this book examines

‘the problem of order’ arising from the existence of

weapons of mass destruction.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Problem of

International Nuclear Order 2. The Awakenings 3. Sculpting

an Order out of Disorder: Nuclear Weapons and the Cold

War, 1945-1970 4. Two Crises of Nuclear Order, 1973-1986

5. A Fortuitous Sequence of Events: The Nuclear Order’s

Consolidation, 1986-1997 6. The Shifting and Expanding

Problems of Nuclear Order, 1997-2008: The Regular and

Irregular Domains of Interaction 7. Towards the Recovery or

Breakdown of Nuclear Order? 8. Conclusion: Reflections on

the Evolution of Order and Disorder. Bibliography

June 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp

Hb: 978-0-415-42105-8: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-42106-5: £23.99

For more information, visit:



National Security Cultures

Patterns of Global Governance

Edited by Emil J. Kirchner, University of Essex, UK

and James Sperling, University of Akron, USA

‘National Security Cultures

offers a tightly argued,

deeply researched, and

empirically encompassing

analysis. It establishes the

enduring imprints

Westphalian and post-

Westphalian state structures

have on governance in East

and West, and it tracks the

variable effects of national

security cultures on policies

spanning the full governance

spectrum. An impressive achievement that will

become required reading in the field of security

studies.‘ – Peter J. Katzenstein, Cornell University, USA

This edited collection examines changes in national

security culture in the wake of international events

that have threatened regional or global order, and

analyses the effects of these divergent responses on

international security.

Selected Contents: 1. National Security Cultures,

Technologies of Public Goods Supply and Security

Governance James Sperling Part 1: Europe 2. France: A

Departure from Exceptionalism Bastien Irondelle and Sophie

Besancenot 3. Germany: The Continuity of Change

Sebastian Harnisch and Raimund Wolf 4. Italy: Hard Tests

and Soft Responses Paolo Foradori and Paolo Rosa 5. United

Kingdom: How Much Continuity? How Much Change?

Martin Smith 6. European Union: Moving Towards a

European Security Culture? Emil J. Kirchner Part 2: North

America 7. Canada: Facing up to Regional Security

Challenges Osvaldo Croci 8. Mexico: Current and Future

Security Challenges Roberto Dominguez 9. United States:

A Full Spectrum Contributor to Governance? James Sperling

Part 3: Euroasia 10. China: Power, Complementarity and

Reflexivity Anthony Coates 11. Japan: From Deterrence to

Prevention Haruhiro Fukui 12. Russia: A Global Power?

Derek Averre 13. Conclusion: Structure, Agency and the

Barriers to Global Security Han Dorussen, Emil J. Kirchner

and James Sperling

June 2010: 234 x 156: 336pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77742-1: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77743-8: £28.99

eBook: 978-0-203-85061-9

For more information, visit:



Narcos Over the Border

Gangs, Cartels and Mercenaries

Edited by Robert J. Bunker, Counter-OPFOR

Corporation, USA

The book takes a hard hitting look at the drug wars

taking place in Mexico between competing gangs,

cartels, and mercenary factions; their insurgency against

the Mexican state; the narco-violence and terrorism that

is increasingly coming over the border into the United

States, and its interrelationship with domestic prison and

street gangs. Analysis and response strategies are

provided by leading writers on 3GEN gang theory,

counterterrorism, transnational organized crime, and

homeland security.

August 2010: 246 x 174: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56072-6: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy 15


Realism and World Politics

Edited by Ken Booth, Aberystwyth University, UK

This book contributes to the

rethinking of realism through

multiple analyses of the keys

works of Kenneth Waltz,

arguing that a sophisticated

appreciation of realism is needed

to truly understand world politics

and International Relations.

Selected Contents: Preface

1. Realism Redux: Contexts,

Concepts, Contests Ken Booth

Part 1: Political Ideas in

Waltzian Realism 2. Anarchy

and Violence Interdependence Daniel Deudney 3. Bringing

Realism to American Liberalism: Kenneth Waltz and the

Process of Cold War Adjustment Michael Foley 4. Waltz,

Realism and Democracy Michael C. Williams Part 2:

Challenges to Structural Realist Theory 5. Waltz’s

Theory of Theory Ole Wæver 6. Structure? What Structure?

Nicholas Onuf 7. ‘Big and important things in IR’: Structural

Realism and the Neglect of Changes in Statehood Georg

Sørensen 8. Reckless States and Realism John Mearsheimer

Part 3: Realist Theories and Human Nature 9. Structural

Realism, Classical Realism and Human Nature Chris Brown

10. Human Nature and World Politics: Rethinking ‘Man’ Neta

Crawford 11. Women, the State, and War Jean Bethke

Elshtain Part 4: War and Security, Causes and

Consequences 12. Understanding Man, the State and War

Hidemi Suganami 13. Lost in Transition: A Critical Analysis of

Power Transition Theory Richard Ned Lebow and Benjamin

Valentino 14. Hegemony, Equilibrium and Counterpower: A

Synthetic Approach Cornelia Beyer 15. Nuclear Weapons in

Waltz’s World: More Trust may be Better Nicholas J. Wheeler

Part 5: Continuity and Change in the International and

in the World 16. How Hierarchical can International Society

Be? Ian Clark 17. Waltz and World History: The Paradox of

Parsimony Barry Buzan and Richard Little 18. Human

Interconnectedness Andrew Linklater Part 6: Conclusion

19. International Politics: The Inconvenient Truth Ken Booth

December 2010: 234 x 156: 352pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57057-2: £95.00

Pb: 978-0-415-57058-9: £26.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Realism Reader

Colin Elman, Maxwell School of Syracuse University,


Despite some years in the doldrums, political realism is

recovering its previously dominant role as the leading

paradigm in the international relations sub-field.

Realism’s return to prominence has been accompanied

by a surge of new research, and by the development of

several distinct variants within the research tradition.

The Realism Reader provides a ’one-stop-shop’ for

undergraduates and masters students taking a course

in contemporary international relations theory, with a

particular focus on realism.

The reader collects centrally important realist works,

organized around different approaches (for example,

neoclassical realism); important critiques of realism (for

example, the institutionalist critique); and some debates

realists and their critics have engaged in concerning

recent events (for example, whether different realist

theories can account for the collapse of the Soviet Union

and the end of the Cold War).

June 2011: 246 x 174: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77354-6: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77357-7: £24.99

For more information, visit:



iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy

Forthcoming in 2011


Recovering Realism

Colin Elman, Maxwell School of Syracuse University,


After a period of being criticized for being out-dated,

political realism is once again recovering its position as

the dominant approach in the international relations

sub-field. So far there is no book that systematically

collects and collates the different strands of

contemporary realism, accounting for their different

predictions and explaining their prescriptions for

policymakers. This book provides a broad survey of

contemporary realist scholarship, and builds on Elman’s

earlier work on the relationship between realism and

foreign policy; balance of power theory; realism and

typologies; and the metatheoretic status of realism.

The book serves as a companion volume to The Realism

Reader and the chapters have been matched accordingly.

Selected Contents: 1. Recovering Realism: The Return of

Pessimism 2. The Roots of the Realist Tradition 3. Classical

Realism: The Twentieth Century 4. Balance of Power Theory

5. Neorealism 6. Defensive Structural Realism 7. Offensive

Structural Realism 8. Rise and Fall Realism 9. Neoclassical

Realism 10. The Liberal Critique 11. The Institutionalist

Critique 12. The Constructivist Critique 13. Realism and

European Cooperation 14. Realism, American ’Hegemony,’

and ’Soft’ Balancing 15. Realism and the Rise of Nonstate

Actors 16. Conclusion

June 2011: 246 x 174: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77358-4: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77359-1: £22.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The Liberal Peace

Selected Essays

Michael W. Doyle, Columbia University, USA

This volume is a collection of the best essays by Prof.

Michael Doyle on the topics of liberalism and peace.

The connection between liberalism and peace is important

because liberal republics have proven to be the dominant

practice in the international system. For many, they are the

ideal of modern politics and their separate peace has

emerged as the most significant and stable zone of peace

in modern world history. This collection includes Prof.

Doyle’s seminal articles from the 1980s, which helped

launch the ’Democratic Peace’ debate, through to the

policy implications of liberal internationalism in the

post-Cold War era. The volume concludes with a new

essay that addresses a variety of criticisms that have been

made of his interpretation of the liberal peace.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Kantian Theory

of Liberalism 1. Kant, Liberal Legacies, and Foreign Affairs:

Part I (1983) 2. Kant, Liberal Legacies, and Foreign Affairs:

Part II (1983) 3. Liberalism and World Politics (1986)

Part 2: Liberalism in Theoretical Context 4. Politics and

Grand Strategy (1993) 5. The Voice of the People: Political

Theorists on the International Implications of Democracy

(1994) 6. One World, Many Peoples: International Justice

in John Rawls’s The Law of Peoples (2006) Part 3: Liberal

Grand Strategies: Ethics and Politics 7. An International

Liberal Community (1992) 8. A More Perfect Union? The

Liberal Peace and the Challenge of Globalization (2000)

9. A Few Words on Mill, Walzer and Nonintervention (2009)

Part 4: Conclusion 10. Conclusion: Liberal Peace revisited

(2010). References

March 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78174-9: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-78175-6: £22.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

China, Oil and Global Politics

Philip Andrews-Speed, University of Dundee, UK

and Roland Dannreuther, University of

Westminster, UK

Series: Routledge Contemporary China Series

This book provides a critical overview of China’s

international energy strategy and the implications of this

for regional and international security.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. China’s Energy

Challenges and Policy Priorities 3. Explaining China’s Energy

Policy 4. China’s Growing Presence in the International Oil

and Gas Arena 5. Integration, the West and Energy:

Conceptualising China’s International Energy Policy

6. The Revisionist Alternative: Energy and the Sino-Russian

Axis 7. Regional Hegemony and the Quest for Energy

Security 8. Global Expansion and the Neo-Imperialist

Temptation 9. Conclusion

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60395-9: £85.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

China’s Strategic Competition

with the United States

Russell Ong, University of Manchester, UK

Series: Routledge Security in Asia Series

China’s rise as an economic, political, and military power

and the expansion of its diplomatic activism beyond Asia

into Europe, Latin America, Africa, and the Middle East

has profoundly transformed its relationship with the

United States. This book examines the transformation

and the multifaceted nature of the relationship between

US and China in the twenty-first century, and argues

that it is more competitive than co-operative, even in

areas that are amenable to co-operation such as trade

and nuclear non-proliferation.

Selected Contents: Acknowledgements. Introduction

1. US Global Supremacy 2. US and the Export of Liberal

Democracy 3. US and the World Economic System 4. US

and the Taiwan Issue 5. The US-Japanese Alliance 6. The

North Korean Nuclear Issue 7. The US-South Korea Alliance

8. Central Asia. Conclusions. Endnotes. Selected

Bibliography. Index

June 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56107-5: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


China’s Rise – Threat

or Opportunity?

Edited by Herbert S. Yee, Macau Polytechnic

University, China

Series: Routledge Security in Asia Series

This book presents a comprehensive overview of how

China’s rise is perceived in a wide range of countries and

regions; these include China’s neighbours, other world

powers, the parts of China not part of mainland China

– Taiwan, Hong Kong and Macau – and regions of the

world where China is having an unexpected impact,

such as the Middle East.

Selected Contents: 1. Power Transition Theory: A Challenge

to the Peaceful Rise of World Power China 2. Core Elements

in a Rising China’s Foreign Policy and Key Issues in

Sino-American Relations 3. China’s Rise and Russia’s Interests

4. European Perspectives on China’s Rise 5. Sino-Vatican

Relations on China’s Rise 6. Middle-Eastern Perceptions of

China’s Rise 7. Too Close for Comfort?: Japanese and Korean

Perspectives on China’s Rise 8. Political and Economic Friction

between China and Japan 9. Indian Perspectives on China:

Concerns and Prospects 10. Accommodation with Hedging:

Southeast Asia’s Changing Perspectives toward China

11. Indonesia’s Perceptions of the ’China Threat’: From ’Yellow

Threat from the North’ to ’Strategic Partner’ 12. The ’China

Threat’ in the Context of China’s Peaceful Development:

A View from Australia 13. A New Era of Mainland-Taiwan

Relations? 14. The Response of Hong Kong and Macao to

Mainland China’s Emergence: Trends and Prospects 15. From

’China Threat’ to ’China Responsibility’: Changing Perceptions

about China in the Western Media and China’s Response

October 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57606-2: £85.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

China’s Soft Power and

International Relations

Edited by Hongyi Lai and Yiyi Lu, both at University

of Nottingham, UK

Series: China Policy Series

This book provides a comprehensive overview of China’s

use of ’soft power’ and assesses the impact this is having

on the world and on the process of international


Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Soft Language, Soft

Imagery and Soft Power in China’s Diplomatic Lexicon David

Scott 3. The Failure of China’s Soft Power Rhetoric: The

‘Peaceful Rise’ and the Internal Debate over the Concept in

China Dominik Mierzejewski 4. China’s Cultural Diplomacy:

Going for Soft Power Hongyi Lai 5. Challenges for China’s

International Communication Yiyi Lu 6. Challenges for

China’s Harmonious Diplomacy Xiaohui (Anne) Wu and

Cheng Qian 7. Debunking the Myth of China’s Soft Power:

Changes in China’s Use of Foreign Assistance from 1949 to

the Present Merriden Varrall 8. Is China Rising at America’s

Expenses? Anti-Americanism and Pro-China Sentiments in

Global Public Opinion Zixiao Yang, David Zweig, Zhengxu

Wang 9. Drifting between Taoguangyanghui and Diplomatic

Activism: China’s Foreign Policy as a Rising Power Suisheng

Zhao 10. Managing Chinese Soft Power Yongnian Zheng

and Chi Zhang

April 2011: 234 x 156

Hb: 978-0-415-60401-7: £80.00

For more information, visit:


The Domestic Sources of

China’s Foreign Policy

Regimes, Leadership, Priorities and Process

Lai Hongyi, University of Nottingham, UK

Series: China Policy Series

This book offers an accessible, informative and

up-to-date systemic analysis of the foreign policy of

China. It demonstrates how domestic factors have

profoundly shaped China’s foreign policy, from the late

Mao’s era to the reform era, presenting its argument

through an in-depth analysis of major cases of Chinese

foreign policy.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Analytical Framework

1. Introduction: Bringing Back Domestic Politics in Studies

of Foreign Policy 2. Internal Sources of External Policy: An

Analytical Framework Part 2: Cases of China’s Foreign

Policy 3. Domestic Regimes and Leaders’ Vision: Relations

with Southeast Asia 4. Leadership Succession, Priority,

Debates, and Shocks: WTO Accession 5. Managing

Domestic-External Interaction: China-U.S. WTO Agreement

6. Securing Strategic Resources for Domestic Economy:

Oil Diplomacy 7. Institutions and Players: Diversified Policy

Making Process Part 3: Conclusion 8. Understanding a

Rising China

April 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56237-9: £85.00

For more information, visit:



Islam in the Eyes of the West

Images and Realities in an Age of Terror

Edited by Tareq Y. Ismael, University of Calgary,

Canada and Andrew Rippin, University of

Victoria, Canada

Series: Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic

World Series

After the terrorist attacks of

9/11 in New York, and the

Madrid and London bombings,

Muslim communities in the

West have generated security

issues and political concern.

This book challenges the

authenticity of popular myths

about the Islamic world and

examines these myths as

ideological cover for the

’war on terror’ and Iraq war.

Selected Contents: 1. The

‘West’ and the Islamic World: Patterns of Confrontation

and Paths to Reconciliation 2. The Origin of Difference:

Edward Said, Michel Foucault and the modern image of Islam

3. Demonizing the Enemy in the War on Terror 4. Islam and

Muslims as seen by the Christian Zionists 5. Vigilante

Masculinity and the ‘War on Terror’ 6. Islam in the US: The

Contemporary Scene 7. ‘Jihadiology’ and the Problem of

Reaching a Contemporary Understanding of Jihad 8. Muslims,

Neighbours in Asia? The Transformation of Japan’s Perceptions

of Islam as Shown in Its Media 9. US Politics, Media and

Muslims in the Post 9/11 Era 10. Media and Societal Discourse

on Western-Muslim Relations 11. Understanding the Muslim

World: We Can Do Better 12. Applying ’the McCarthy Test’

to Canadian and American Security Legislation: A 10-Year

Retrospective on the Impact of September 11, 2001 on Privacy

Rights 13. Huntington’s ‘Clash of Civilizations’: Rumours and

Clarification 14. Getting it Wrong Yet Again: America and the

Islamic Mainstream

June 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56414-4: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Adelphi series

The Adelphi series is The International

Institute for Strategic Studies’ flagship

contribution to policy-relevant, original

academic research.

Climate Conflict

How Global Warming Threatens

Security and What to Do about It

Jeffrey Mazo

This Adelphi explores how

cultures have met the climate

challenge and provides lessons

for how the modern world can

handle the new security threats

posed by unprecedented global


March 2010: 234 x 156: 168pp

Pb: 978-0-415-59118-8: £9.99

For more information, visit:



Sanctions as Grand


Brendan Taylor

This Adelphi focuses on the

different sanctions strategies

of the United States, China,

Russia, Japan and the EU, with

regard to the unfolding nuclear

crises in Iran and North Korea. It

examines how these measures,

designed to marginalise the

regimes in both countries and

restrict their ability to develop

nuclear weapons, have also

influenced the sanctioning

states’ international partners.

As such, they are not just a tool of statecraft: they are

potentially an important facet of grand strategy.

May 2010: 234 x 156: 124pp

Pb: 978-0-415-59529-2: £9.99

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

iNTerNaTioNal seCuriTy 17

Towards Nuclear Zero

Raimo Väyrynen and David Cortright

April 2010: 234 x 156: 182pp

Pb: 978-0-415-59528-5: £9.99

For more information, visit:


This book examines practical

steps for achieving progress

toward disarmament,

realistically assessing both

challenges and opportunities

associated with achieving a

world without nuclear


Building Peace After War

Mats Berdal, King’s College London, UK

The widespread practice of

external intervention aimed at

building ‘sustainable peace’

within societies ravaged by war

and violence has been a striking

feature of the post-Cold War

era. This book examines the

record of such interventions,

from Cambodia in the early

1990s to ongoing efforts in

Afghanistan and the

Democratic Republic of the

Congo. It examines the variety

of forms that these interventions have taken and

identifies the sources of success and failure in individual

cases. Although the book draws on a wide range of case

studies, its overall approach to the subject is thematic

and covers three major areas.

2009: 234 x 156: 186pp

Pb: 978-0-415-47436-8: £10.99

For more information, visit:





Defining and Defying

Organised Crime

Discourse, Perceptions and Reality

Edited by Felia Allum and Panos A. Kostakos,

both at University of Bath, UK, and Francesca Longo

and Daniela Irrera, both at Università degli Studi di

Catania, Italy

Series: Routledge Advances in International Relations

and Global Politics

Organised crime is now a major threat to all industrial and

non-industrial countries. Using an inter-disciplinary and

comparative approach this book examines the existing,

official institutional discourse on organised crime to

examine whether, or not, it has an impact on perceptions

of the threat and on the reality of organized crime.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Discourse and Definitions

1. Discoursing Organized Crime: Towards a Two Level

Analysis? 2. The Criminal not the Crime: Practitioner Discourse

and the Policing of Organized Crime in England and Wales

3. The Evolution of the European Union’s Understanding

of Organized Crime and its Embedment in EU Discourse

4. International Policy Discourses on Transnational Organized

Crime: The Role of an International Expertise Part 2:

Perceptions 5. Transnational Organized Crime and the

Global Security Agenda: Different Perceptions and Conflicting

strategies? 6. Evolving Perceptions of Organized Crime: The

Use of RICO in the United States 7. The Yakuza and its

Perceived Threat 8. The Social Perception of Organized

Crime in the Balkans: A World of Diverging Views?

Part 3: Reality 9. The Fire behind the Smoke: The Realities

of Human trafficking in Northern Ireland 10. Organized

Crime in Transition-Era Bulgaria: The Elites and the State

11. Organized Crime and Local Politics in Contemporary

Italy: Willing or Unwilling Bedfellows? 12. The Crime-

Terror Nexus: Do Threat Perceptions Align with ‘Reality’?

Conclusion: Getting to Grips with the Deconstruction of

Organized Crime

February 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-54852-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86034-2

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The Nuclear Non-Proliferation

Treaty and India

Edited by Rajiv Nayan, Institute for Defence Studies

& Analysis, India

This book examines the international perspectives on

India’s involvement with the NPT, as well as those from

India itself.

It was published as a special issue of The Strategic


Selected Contents: 1. Between Power & Justice: Current

Problems and Perspectives of NPT Regime Harald Muller

2. Nuclear Disarmament in a Non-Proliferation Context:

A Russian Perspective Alexander Nikitin 3. The Current

Problems of the NPT: How to Strengthen the Nonproliferation

Regime Nobuyasu Abe 4. NPT Review Conference 2010:

Issues and Prospects Arvind Gupta 5. Previewing the 2010

Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty Review Conference Miles A.

Pomper 6. NPT RevCon 2010: An Opportunity to Refocus

Priorities Manpreet Sethi 7. India and the NPT’ Leonard

Weiss 8. India and the NPT Aaron Tovish 9. India and the

NPT: Separating Substantive Facts from Normative Fiction

Anupam Shrivastava and Seema Gahlaut 10. Reforms in

the NPT and Prospects for India’s Accession: A Situational

Analysis A. Vinod Kumar 11. The NPT and India:

Accommodating the Exception Rajiv Nayan

March 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59391-5: £80.00

For more information, visit:


ForeigN PoliCy

ForeigN PoliCy

Forthcoming in 2011

Why Did the US

Invade Iraq?

Edited by Jane K. Cramer, University of Oregon,

USA and A. Trevor Thrall, University of Michigan,

Dearborn, USA

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This volume presents the best scholarly thinking about

why the US invaded Iraq in 2003, a pivotal event in

modern US foreign policy and international politics.

The years since the announcement of the invasion of

Iraq by George W. Bush in 2003 have revealed that the

WMD threat was not the urgent threat the

administration declared and that Saddam Hussein was

not involved with Al Qaeda or 9/11. At least in part

because of these revelations a majority of Americans

(not to mention a majority of people globally) now

believe that invading Iraq was a mistake and that the

Bush administration misled the public to build support

for war. Lending credibility to public doubts is a growing

number of critical scholarly analyses and in-depth

journalistic investigations about the invasion, which

mostly suggests that the administration was not fully

candid about its reasons for wanting to move against

Iraq when it did.

Thus the question remains: Why did the United States

invade Iraq? The central purpose of this volume is to

spur and inform the debate by organizing the best

recent thinking of foreign policy and international

relations experts about why the US invaded Iraq. Taking

a broad range of arguments – about the role of ideas,

Israel, and oil, in particular – and organizing them

around a coherent structure, the book highlights current

areas of agreement and disagreement, and allows

scholars directly to talk to each other.

The volume will be of much interest to students of the

Iraq War, US foreign and security policy, strategic studies,

Middle Eastern politics and IR/Security Studies in general.

Selected Contents: Preface: The Causes of War Stephen

Van Evera 1. Introduction: Hypotheses on Iraq War:

Reflections from a Survey of Experts Jane K. Cramer and A.

Trevor Thrall 2. WMD, the Stated Motive: Pretext or Sincere

Belief? Robert Jervis Part 1: The Role of Ideas in the Iraq

Decision 3. Ideas and Alternatives in American Grand

Strategy, 2000-04 Colin Dueck 4. The Road to Baghdad:

Ideas and Intellectuals in Explanations of the Iraq War

Andrew Flibbert Part 2: The Israel Lobby and the

Neoconservatives 5. The Iraq War and the Israel Lobby

Jerome Slater 6. Neoconservative Motives and Influence

Michael Lind Part 3: Oil and Profits 7. A Motive Hiding in

Plain Sight: War for Oil Michael Klare 8. Oil and the Iraq War

John S. Duffield 9. The Myth of Neoconservative Power and

Invading Iraq for Primacy and Profits Jane K. Cramer and

Edward Duggan Part 4: Other Views of the Iraq War

10. Why Iraq? The View from Britain Jane M.O. Sharp

March 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78212-8: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-78213-5: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


European-American Relations

and the Middle East

From Suez to Iraq

Edited by Victor Mauer and Daniel Möckli, both at

Swiss Federal Institute of Technology (ETH), Zürich,


Series: CSS Studies in Security and International


This book examines the evolution of European-American

relations with the Middle East since 1945.

Selected Contents: Introduction Daniel Möckli and Victor

Mauer Part 1: Changing Roles and Interests: From Suez

to Iraq 1. Suez 1956: European Colonial Interests and US

Cold War Prerogatives Tore T. Petersen 2. Iraq 2003: Regime

Change and Its European Discontents Victor Mauer

Part 2: The Arab-Israeli Conflict and the West

3. Anglo-American Relations and the Palestine Question,

1945-56 John Sakkas 4. At Odds in the Middle East: Paris,

Washington, and the Six-Day War, 1967 Garret Martin 5. The

EC-Nine and Transatlantic Conflict During the October War

and the Oil Crisis, 1973/74 Daniel Möckli 6. The Euro-Arab

Dialogue, the Venice Declaration, and Beyond: The Limits of

a Distinct EC Policy, 1974-89 David Allen and Andrin Hauri

7. From Madrid to Camp David: Europe, the US, and the

Middle East Peace Process in the 1990s Patrick Müller and

Claire Spencer 8. The Middle East Quartet: A New Role for

Europe? Constanza Musu Part 3: Gulf Security and

Transatlantic Relations 9. Dealing with Iran: The US, Britain,

and Regime Change 1951-3 Malcolm Byrne 10. Securing Gulf

Oil: Britain, NATO, and the Question of Military Intervention

East of Suez, 1949-68 Stephen Blackwell 11. Subcontracting

Security: The US, Britain, and Gulf Security Before the Carter

Doctrine Roland Popp 12. Great Game Redux: The US,

Europe, and Gulf Security in the Late Cold War Peter John

Brobst 13. Europe, the US, and the Gulf After the Cold War

Gerd Nonneman 14. Iran and the Bomb: Washington, the

EU, and Iranian Nuclear Ambitions Harsh V. Pant. Conclusion:

Major Trends in European-American Relations and the Middle

East since 1945 Daniel Möckli and Victor Mauer

October 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47664-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85144-9

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Explaining Pakistan’s

Foreign Policy

Escaping India

Aparna Pande, Hudson Institute, USA

Series: Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Pakistan has over the decades become a hotbed for the

terrorist ideology often referred to as Jihadism. Pande

investigates the underlying principles of Pakistan’s

foreign policy from 1947 until the present day and

explains the rise of Jihadism as an offshoot of Pakistan’s

security concerns. In the eyes of Pakistan’s policy makers,

Pakistan’s interests lay in ‘containing’ India, ‘seeking

parity’ with India in military and political terms, ‘gaining’

allies against India and ‘escaping’ an Indian identity by

disowning shared heritage. Pakistan’s policies towards

India, Afghanistan, United States, China and the Muslim

world reflect various aspects of this very construct.

Selected Contents: 1. Constructing Political Identity

2. Existential Threat 3. Strategic Depth 4. An Alliance

to Ensure Survival 5. All Weather Friendship 6. Virtual

Relocation 7. Pragmatic Bilateralism

January 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59900-9: £85.00

For more information, visit:



European Union Sanctions and

Foreign Policy

When and Why do they Work?

Clara Portela, Singapore Management University

Series: Routledge Advances in European Politics

This book examines sanctions

as a political tool of influence

and evaluates the efficacy of

sanctions imposed by the

European Union (EU) against

countries from the early 1990s

to present day.

Selected Contents:

1. Introduction 2. Sanctions and

their Efficacy 3. EU Sanctions:

Evolution, Legal Framework and

Policy 4. What Determines the

Efficacy of EU Sanctions? 5. The

Efficacy of Sanctions Imposed under the Common Foreign

and Security Policy (CFSP) 6. The Efficacy of ‘Informal’

Sanctions 7. The Efficacy of Development Aid Suspensions

in the Context of the Partnership 8. Withdrawal of Trade

Privileges under the Generalized System of Preferences

9. Sanctions Theory and the Efficacy of EU Sanctions: Some

Fresh Air coming into the Sanctions Debate. Bibliography.

Annex 1: Dataset of EU Sanctions Cases. Annex 2: Truth Table

July 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55216-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84751-0

For more information, visit:



National Security in

the Obama Administration

Reassessing the Bush Doctrine

Stanley A. Renshon, City University of New York

Graduate Center, USA

This book examines the

Bush Doctrine and its effect

and influence on the new

national security agenda of

President Obama.

Selected Contents: Preface

1. The Obama Presidency and

the World He Inherits Part 1: The

Bush Doctrine Reconsidered

2. The Evolution of a Post 9/11

National Security Perspective

3. The Real Bush Doctrine

4. The Bush Doctrine: Myths

and Criticisms Part 2: The Strategic World After 9/11

5. The New Calculus of Risk 6. Deterrence, Containment

and Adversarial Bargaining Post 9/11: North Korea and Iran

7. Dangerous Threats and the Use of Force 8. Strategic

Options and the Future of the Bush Doctrine Part 3: The

Politics of Post 9/11 National Security 9. The Politics

of Risk Assessment 10. The Politics of Post 9/11 National

Security: A Profound Worldview Divide 11. Obama’s

National Security Tasks: Worldview, Leadership and Judgment

2009: 229 x 152: 312pp

Hb: 978-0-415-80406-6: £95.00

Pb: 978-0-415-80405-9: £24.99

eBook: 978-0-203-87451-6

For more information, visit:


Contemporary Security Studies

Forthcoming in 2011

Bush’s Foreign and

Security Policy

Principle or Partisanship?

Donette Murray, Royal Military Academy,

Sandhurst, Camberley, UK

This book offers a fresh assessment of the Bush

presidency. This account challenges readers to look more

closely at the strengths and weaknesses of Bush’s

two-term administration. Carefully reached, it provides

compelling evidence to support its two main arguments:

first, that this was a more complex administration than

its actions, often judged crude and ill-conceived, and

one that was capable of crafting much praised and

politically sound positions. The second argument

contends that the Bush administration largely (though

not entirely) failed to grasp how the international system

was changing and thus failed to position the US to meet

the challenges of the twenty-first century.

April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48661-3: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Justifying America’s Wars

The Conduct and Practice of US Military


Nicholas Kerton-Johnson, Bristol University, UK

This book examines the justifications for, and practice

of, war by the US since 1990, and examines four case

studies, the Gulf War, Kosovo, Afghanistan and Iraq.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Setting the Context:

Intervention and Norms in International Society 3. The Gulf

War 4. The Kosovo Intervention 5. The Intervention in

Afghanistan 6. The Iraq War 7. Conclusion

July 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56168-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86167-7

For more information, visit:


relaTed jourNal

Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

ForeigN PoliCy 19

Forthcoming in 2011

US Collective Memory,

Intervention and Vietnam

The Cultural Politics of US Foreign Policy

since 1969

David Ryan, University College Cork, Ireland

The Vietnam War has generated significant diplomatic

and cultural influences on US foreign policy. This book

will explore the construction and interaction of US

collective memory with the politics of US intervention

since the late 1960s.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Collective

Memory, Vietnam and US Post-War Strategy 1. On

Collective Memory & Vietnam 2. Counterpoint: War and

Historiography 3. Vietnam: Strategic Implications Part 2: US

Intervention Since Vietnam 4. ’We Will Not be the Paper

Tigers of Saigon’: Ford and the Immediate Aftermath 5. ’We

Are Now Free of that Inordinate Fear’: Carter and Non-

Intervention 6. The United States of Amnesia and the Reagan

Doctrine 7. We’ve Kicked the Vietnam Syndrome? Bush and

the Gulf War 8. Clinton’s Criteria: The Crisis of Intervention

and Cultural Adjustments 9. 9/11: The War on Terrorism and

the End of the Vietnam Syndrome? 10. Iraq. Conclusions

January 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-40564-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:



US Foreign Policy and Iran

American-Iranian Relations since the

Islamic Revolution

Donette Murray, Royal Military Academy,

Sandhurst, Camberley, UK

US Foreign Policy and Iran is a study of US foreign policy

decision-making in relation to Iran and its implications

for Middle Eastern relations.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The Iran Syndrome 1. The

Crucible of Revolution: Carter’s Bitter Legacy 2. Reagan:

After the Revolution, in Search of a Policy 3. George H.W.

Bush: War and Peace 4. Clinton: Volte-Face 5. George W.

Bush: The Enemy of my Enemy. Conclusion: The Carcass of

Dead Policies. Select Bibliography

June 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Pb: 978-0-415-58139-4: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Security Index

A Russian Journal on International Security

New to Routledge in 2010

Journal of The Russian Center for Policy Studies (PIR Center)

Editor-in-Chief: Vladimir A. Orlov, PIR Center, Russia

Security Index provides readers with serious, professional, and unbiased

examinations of urgent issues in the sphere of international security that

are relevant to Russian interests. It contains articles by leading Russian

governmental and nongovernmental experts and young researchers that

cover a broad range of international security matters - from climate change

and demography to nuclear non-proliferation and disarmament, from the

situation in North Korea to defence contracts in Latin America. The journal has an established reputation

as an independent source of information for decision-makers from Russia and abroad, for international

organizations and the academic community.

For more information on the journal, including subscription details, please visit: www.tandf.co.uk/journals/rsec


ForeigN PoliCy

Buying National Security

How America Plans and Pays for Its

Global Role and Safety at Home

Gordon Adams, School of International Service,

American University, USA and Cindy Williams,

Massachusetts Institute of Technology, USA

The tools of American statecraft

– defense, diplomacy, foreign

and security assistance,

homeland security and

intelligence – are rarely

examined together. Adams

and Williams fill this gap by

examining how these tools

work, how they are planned for,

and how they are budgeted.

Buying National Security

weaves a tapestry around

the institutions, organizations,

tools, and processes that support planning and resource

allocation across the breadth of the American national

security enterprise. The authors analyze the planning

and resource integration activities across agencies of the

Executive branch as well as examine the structure and

processes the Congress uses to carry out its national

security oversight and budgetary responsibilities. Finally,

they review the adequacy of the current structures and

process and evaluate proposals for ways both might be

reformed to fit the demands of the twenty-first century

security environment.

Selected Contents: 1. Money is Policy: Planning and

Budgeting for Security and Foreign Affairs 2. Resource

Planning for International Affairs and State Operations

3. Foreign Economic Assistance Budgeting and Programs

4. Political and Security Assistance Budgeting and Programs

5. Planning, Programming, Budgeting, and Execution in the

Department of Defense 6. Intelligence Planning and

Budgeting 7. Resource Allocation and Budgeting for

Homeland Security 8. The Role of the Executive Office of

the President in National Security Budgeting 9. Resource

Allocation and Budgeting in Congress 10. The Politics of

National Security Budgeting 11. The Road Ahead: How

Might Budgeting Change?

2009: 229 x 152: 368pp

Hb: 978-0-415-95439-6: £95.00

Pb: 978-0-415-95440-2: £32.99

eBook: 978-0-203-86150-9

For more information, visit:



EU Foreign Policy and Post-

Soviet Conflicts

Stealth Intervention

Nicu Popescu, European Council on Foreign

Relations, UK

Series: Routledge Advances in European Politics

This book examines EU intervention and nonintervention

in conflict resolution, with a specific focus

on the EU’s role in the post-soviet conflicts of Moldova,

Abkhazia and South Ossetia in Georgia and Azerbaijan.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Europeanization

of Foreign Policy 3. Foreign Policy and State Identity 4. The

Europeanization of Finnish Foreign and Security Policy Discourse:

From Neutrality to Alignment Identity 5. The Europeanization of

British Foreign and Security Policy Discourse: Re-articulating the

Great Power Identity 6. Comparing the Reproduction of State

Identities in Finland and Britain 7. Conclusion

December 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58720-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83478-7

For more information, visit:


Routledge Studies in US Foreign


Series edited by John Dumbrell,

University of Durham, UK and I. Parmar,

University of Manchester, UK

This new series sets out to publish high

quality works by leading and emerging

scholars critically engaging with United

States Foreign Policy. The series includes

a variety of approaches to the subject and

draws on scholarship from international

relations, security studies, international

political economy, foreign policy analysis

and contemporary international history.


American Foreign Policy and

Postwar Reconstruction

Comparing Japan and Iraq

Jeff Bridoux, Aberystwyth University, UK

This book provides a detailed comparison of the

reconstruction of Japan from 1945 to 1952 with the

current reconstruction of Iraq, evaluating the key factors

affecting the success or failure of such projects.

The book seeks to understand why American officials

believed that extensive social reengineering aiming at

seeding democracy and economic development is

replicable, through identifying factors explaining the

outcome of US-led post-conflict reconstruction projects.

The analysis reveals that in addition to the effective use

of material resources of power, the outcome of

reconstruction projects depends on a variety of other

intertwined factors, and Bridoux provides a new

analytical framework relying on a Gramscian concept

of power to develop a greater understanding of these

factors, and the ultimate success or failure of these

reconstruction projects.

September 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56397-0: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84341-3

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

American Intellectuals

and US Strategy

Forging the National Security Strategy

during and after the Cold War

Paulo J.B. Ramos, Universidade Independente,


This book examines the relationship between academics

and government, studying the other voices that are usually

forgotten when national security issues are discussed.

Selected Contents: Introduction. Politics, Strategy and

Knowledge, 1935-1945. Constructing American Strategic

Doctrine, 1945-1960. Scientific Strategists and the Seat of

Power, 1960s. Strategy, Personalities and Circumstances,

1970s. American Strategic Hegemony, 1980s. (Re)

Constructing American Grand Strategy, 1990s. After 9/11:

A new American Grand Strategy?. Conclusion

July 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43739-4: £70.00

eBook: 978-0-203-94617-6

For more information, visit:



America’s Freedom Agenda

Towards the Middle East

Democracy or Domination

Oz Hassan, University of Warwick, UK

This book looks at how and why the Bush administration

constructed democracy promotion for

the Middle East as an American national interest. It then

proceeds to demonstrate how new institutions were

created, within the American foreign policy bureaucracy,

which pursued a particular mode of democratisation

that would be congruent with other American national

interests. As such, it highlights how the crisis presented

by September 11 2001 led to regime change in

Afghanistan and Iraq, but more broadly how American

policy towards the region had a softer imperial side,

which drew on broader economic theories of

democratisation and modernisation.

June 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60310-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Race and US Foreign Policy

The African-American Foreign Affairs Network

Mark Ledwidge, University of Manchester, UK

The book provides a cutting edge insight into the racial

aspect of US foreign affairs, documenting through

case-specific analyses of the evolutionary development of

the African American foreign affairs network (AAFAN).

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Forging of the

African-American Foreign Affairs Community 3. The

Italo-Ethiopian War 4. From Isolationism to Globalism:

African-Americans’ Response to US Entry into the Second

World War 5. African-Americans and the Formation of the

United Nations 6. Human Rights, Racial Reconstruction and

the Cold War 7. Malcolm and Martin and the Shadow of US

Foreign Policy 8. Conclusion

March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48211-0: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Forthcoming in 2011

Beyond Anti-Americanism

The Case for Criticism not Prejudice

Brendon O’Connor, Griffith University, Australia

Beyond Anti-Americanism presents a case for seeing

anti-Americanism as principally a counterproductive

prejudice. Brendon O’Connor argues that while there are

many reasons to be frustrated with American policies,

politics and even American society, a crucial distinction

should be drawn between criticism and prejudice.

Selected Contents: Introduction: What is Anti-Americanism?

1. The Anti-American Tradition 2. American Power and

Complicating the Anti-American Tradition 3. George W.

Bush and the Resurgence of the Anti-American Tradition

4. Violent Anti-Americanism: bin Laden, al Qaeda and

Terrorism Conclusion: Beyond the Anti-American Tradition

June 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47428-3: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-47429-0: £22.99

For more information, visit:



Constructing US Foreign Policy

The Curious Case of Cuba

David Bernell, Oregon State University, USA

This book addresses the roots of the hostility that has

characterized the United States’ relationship with Cuba

and has persisted for decades, even in the wake of the

end of the Cold War. It answers the question of why

America’s Cold War era policy toward Cuba has not

substantially changed, despite a radically changed

international environment.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Imagining Latin

America and Cuba 3. Constructing Reagan’s Castro

4. Waiting for Fidel 5. Conclusion

January 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78067-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Neoconservatism and

American Foreign Policy

A Critical Analysis

Danny Cooper, Griffith University, Australia

At the time of America’s 2003 invasion of Iraq, the term

’neoconservative’ was enjoying wide currency. To this

day, it remains a term that engenders much debate and

visceral reaction. Exploring the historical significance of

this ongoing movement and its impact on American

foreign policy traditions, this book will be of great interest

to all scholars of foreign policy, American politics and

American history.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Neoconservatism

and its Authors 3. Neocons and the Idea of Human Rights

4. The Neocons and the War of Ideology 5. Neocons,

Preponderance and Order 6. Neocons, American Power

and Preventive War 7. Conclusion

October 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59221-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84052-8

For more information, visit:



Soft Power and

US Foreign Policy

Theoretical, Historical and Contemporary


Edited by Inderjeet Parmar, University of

Manchester, UK and Michael Cox

The rise of widespread negative

attitudes towards US foreign

policy, especially due to the

war of aggression against Iraq

and the subsequent military

occupation of the country –

has brought new attention to

the meaning and instruments

of soft power. In this edited

collection, an outstanding line

up of contributors provides the

most extensive discussion of

soft power to date.

Soft Power has become part of popular political discourse

since it was coined by Harvard’s Joseph Nye, and this

volume features a brand new chapter by Nye outlining his

views on soft, hard and smart power and offers a critique

of the Bush administration’s inadequacies. He then goes

on to examine the challenges for the incoming US

president. The other contributions to the volume respond

to Nye’s views from a range of theoretical, historical and

policy perspectives giving new insights in to both soft

power and the concept of power itself.

Selected Contents: Introduction Inderjeet Parmar and

Michael Cox 1. The Future of Soft Power in US Foreign Policy

Joseph Nye Jr. 2. From Hegemony to Soft Power Geraldo

Zahran and Leonardo Ramos 3. Soft Power and Strategy:

Developing a ’Strategic’ Concept of Power Edward Lock

4. The Unbearable Lightness of Soft Power Christopher Layne

5. The Power Game, Soft Power and the International

Historian Till Geiger 6. Challenging Elite Anti-Americanism in

the Cold War Inderjeet Parmar 7. Technological Leadership

and American Soft Power John Krige 8. The Military Use of

Soft Power – Information Campaigns: The Challenge of

Application, their Audiences and Effects Angus Taverner

9. Public Diplomacy and the Information War on Terror

Philip Taylor 10. Soft Power in an Era of US Decline Giles

Scott-Smith 11. Cheques and Balances: The EU’s Soft Power

Strategy Christopher Hill 12. The Myth and Reality of China’s

Soft Power Shogo Suzuki 13. Responding to my Critics and

Concluding Thoughts Joseph Nye

March 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49203-4: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-49204-1: £25.99

eBook: 978-0-203-85649-9

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies


ForeigN PoliCy 21

The US Public and American

Foreign Policy

Edited by Andrew Johnstone, University of

Leicester, UK and Helen Laville, University of

Birmingham, UK

Though often overlooked, public opinion has always

played a significant role in the development and

promotion of US foreign policy and this work seeks to

comprehensively assess the impact and nature of that

opinion through a collection of historical and

contemporary essays.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Andrew Johnstone and

Helen Laville Section 1: The Public and War 2. From Coast

Defence to Embalmed Beef: The Influence of the Press and

Public Opinion on McKinley’s Policymaking during the

Spanish-American War Joseph Smith 3. To Mobilize a Nation:

Citizens Organizations and Intervention and on the Eve of

WWII Andrew Johnstone 4. Power to the People? American

Public Opinion and the Vietnam War Andrew Priest Section

2: Public Interests and Ideology 5. Organized Labor and

the Social Foundations of American Diplomacy, 1898-1920

Rhodri Jeffreys-Jones 6. Religion and World Order at the

Dawn of the American Century Andrew Preston 7. Gender

Apartheid? American Women and Women’s Rights in

American Foreign Policy Helen Laville Section 3: Interests

and Ethnicity 8. African Americans and US Foreign Policy:

The American Negro Leadership Conference on Africa and

the Rhodesian Crisis Carl P. Watts 9. The American Public

and the US-Israeli ’Special’ Relationship Elizabeth Stephens

10. The Cuban Lobby and US Policy toward Cuba Jessica

Gibbs Section 4: The Public and the War on Terror

11. Neoconservatism and the American Public: Was 9/11

a Hegemonic Moment? Maria Ryan 12. ’You Don’t Launch

a Marketing Campaign in August’: The Bush Administration

and the Public Before and After the Iraq Invasion Scott Lucas

June 2010: 234 x 156: 232pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55315-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84927-9

For more information, visit:



US Policy Towards Cuba

Since the Cold War

Jessica Gibbs, Aberystwyth University, UK

This is a comprehensive examination of US policy

towards Cuba with a particular emphasis on the

post-Cold War era. As well as providing a detailed

account of US policy and actions towards Castro’s

regime, Jessica Gibbs also illustrates how this case study

provides a revealing insight into wider debates about US

foreign policy and international relations theory.

Selected Contents: 1. The United States and Cuba: From the

Cuban Revolution to the Fall of the Berlin Wall 2. The Cuban

Democracy Act: ‘Putting the Hammer down on Fidel Castro’?

3. Continuity and Change under Clinton 4. The Rafter Crisis

of 1994 5. The Helms-Burton Act: ‘Adios Fidel’? 6. The

Transformation of the Anti-Embargo Movement 7. The Elian

Gonzalez Case: ‘We won’t Forget, We Vote’ 8. George W.

Bush: Champion of the Anti-Castro Cause? 9. Conclusion

November 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43747-9: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-94612-1

For more information, visit:



regioNal seCuriTy: asia


seCuriTy: asia

The Routledge Handbook of

Asian Security Studies

Edited by Sumit Ganguly, Indiana University, USA,

Andrew Scobell, Texas A&M University, USA and

Joseph Liow, Nanyang Technological University,


The Handbook of Asian Security

Studies provides a detailed

exploration of security dynamics

in the three distinct subregions

that comprise Asia, and also

bridges the study of these regions

by exploring the geopolitical links

between each of them.

Selected Contents:

Part 1: Northeast Asia 1. China’s

Rise: How Peaceful? 2. Japan’s

Security Future 3. The Security of

the Korean Peninsula 4. The Taiwan Issue 5. The Tibetan

Question 6. The Shanghai Cooperation Organization and Its

Implications for Regional Security 7. US-China Relations

Part 2: South Asia 8. Kashmir and the Indo-Pakistani Conflict

9. Nuclear Weapons and Crisis Stability in South Asia 10. The

Sino-Indian Rivalry 11. India’s Experiences with Insurgency and

Counter-Insurgency 12. The Sri Lankan Civil War 13. Pakistan’s

Quest for Security 14. Insurgency, Instability, and the Security

of Afghanistan Part 3: Southeast Asia 15. The Association

of Southeast Asian Nations 16. Bilateral Tensions in ASEAN

17. Great Power Politics and Southeast Asian Security

18. Maritime Security in Southeast Asia 19. Internal Conflicts

in Southeast Asia 20. Islamic Extremism in Southeast Asia

21. Burma/Myanmar: How Flourishing the ’Disciplined

Democracy’? Part 4: Cross Regional Issues 22. Maritime

Rivalry in Asia 23. The ASEAN Regional Forum 24. The New

Security Agenda in Asia: Making Spaces for Non-Traditional

Security Formulations of Emerging Security Challenges

2009: 246 x 174: 336pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77781-0: £125.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86510-1

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Asia’s Nuclear Futures

Chung Min Lee, National University of Singapore

Series: Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

This book provides a comprehensive assessment of

the role of nuclear weapons in Asia since 1945, its

implications for regional and global security, and the

conditions under which more Asian countries might

seek to acquire a nuclear capability in the future.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Proliferation Networks

Preface. Introduction 1. Nuclear Weapons in Asia and

Proliferation Networks Part 2: Nuclear Pandora’s Arc

2. Proliferation Before and After the A.Q. Khan Network

3. Failed States and Nuclear Weapons Part 3: Tipping

Points and New Security Dilemmas 4. Tipping Points:

Japan, South Korea, and Taiwan 5. Deterrence and New

Security Dilemmas Part 4: A Brave New World? 6. Nuclear

Proliferation in Asia and Consequences for Global Security

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-42825-5: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

3rd Edition

International Politics

of the Asia Pacific

Since 1945

Michael Yahuda, London School of Economics and

Political Science, University of London, UK

Series: Politics in Asia

This fully revised third edition of Michael Yahuda’s

extremely successful textbook brings the region bang

up-to-date, introducing students to the international

politics of the Asia-Pacific region since 1945. As well as

assessing the post-cold War uncertainties that challenged

balance and power with the region, Yahuda also examines

the first decade of the new millennium, new political

administrations in all the key player-states and increased

cooperative security between some nations, polarised by

volatile relationships between others. Anyalzing politics

in terms of global, regional and local trends, this new

edition features:

• examination of the continued Rise of China in terms

of politics, security and economic dominance

• ongoing debates concerning the ’war on terror’ and

how this shifts, forms and reforms relationships

• Asia-Pacific security issues.

Selected Contents: Section 1: The Cold War, 1945–1989

Part 1: The International Politics of the Asia-Pacific

Introduction 1. The Impact of the Cold War and the

Struggles for Independence, 1945–1954 2. The Application

of Bipolarity, 1954–1970 3. The Period of Tripolarity,

1971–1989 Part 2: The Policies of the Great Powers

4. The United States and the Asia-Pacific 5. The Soviet

Union/Russia and the Asia-Pacific 6. China and the

Asia-Pacific 7. Japan and the Asia-Pacific Section 2: The

post-Cold War Period Part 1: The Era of American

Pre-Eminence 8. From Unipolarity to Multipolarity

1991-2010 9. The United States: From the End of the Cold

War to the War on Terrorism and Beyond 10. China: China’s

Ascent to Global Economic Power and Political Influence

11. Japan: Coping with Relative Decline

January 2011: 234 x 156: 344pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47479-5: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-47480-1: £22.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Routledge Handbook

of Asian Regionalism

Edited by Mark Beeson, University of Western

Australia and Richard Stubbs, McMaster University,


The Routledge Handbook of Asian Regionalism

is a definitive introduction to, and analysis of, the

development of regionalism in Asia, including coverage

of East Asia, Southeast Asia and South Asia. The result

is a comprehensive exploration of what is arguably the

most dynamic and important region in the world.

The Routledge Handbook of Asian Regionalism will be

an indispenable resource for students and scholars of

Asia politics, international relations and regionalism.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Conceptualizing the Asian

Region Part 2: Economic Issues Part 3: Political Issues

Part 4: Strategic Issues Part 5: Organizations

June 2011: 246 x 174: 400pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58054-0: £110.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

2nd Edition

The New Global Politics of the

Asia Pacific

Michael Connors, La Trobe University, Australia,

Remy Davison, Monash University, Australia and

Jörn Dosch, University of Leeds, UK

The fully up-dated 2nd edition

of this introductory textbook

presents a coherent framework

for understanding the complex

international and global politics

of the Asia Pacific region. The

authors provide an overview of

the main actors, institutions and

contemporary issues, such as

security and transnational actors.

Selected Contents:

1. Introduction: New Global

Politics of Asia Pacific 2. The United States in Asia Pacific

3. Japan in Asia Pacific 4. China in Asia Pacific 5. Southeast

Asia and Asia Pacific 6. Australia in Asia Pacific 7. Europe

and Asia Pacific 8. Russia and Asia Pacific 9. India and Asia

Pacific 10. Regional Security in Asia Pacific: Sources of

Conflict and Prospects for Cooperation 11. Globalization

and Regionalism in Asia Pacific 12. The Asian Economic

Miracle and its Unmaking 13. Transnational Actors in Asia

Pacific 14. Culture and Politics in the Asia-Pacific: Asian

Values and Human Rights

March 2011: 246 x 174: 288pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46496-3: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-46497-0: £22.99

For more information, visit:



Religion and Security

in South and Central Asia

Edited by K. Warikoo, Jawaharlal Nehru University,


Series: Central Asia Research Forum

This book provides local perspectives on religion, security,

history, geopolitics and geostrategy in South Asia and

Central Asia in an integrated manner. Presenting a holistic

and updated view of the developments inside and across

South and Central Asia, it offers coherent and concise

analyses by experts on the region.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction K. Warikoo 2. Taliban’s

Resurgence in Afghanistan and Pakistan Frederic Grare

3. Pakistan’s Slide Towards Talibanisation Sushant Sareen

4. Resurgence of the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan:

Implications for Regional Security Deepali Gaur Singh

5. Roads to Perdition: The Politics and Practice of Islamist

Terrorism in India Praveen Swami 6. Islamist Extremism in

Kashmir K. Warikoo 7. Communal Peace in India: Lessons

from Multicultural Banaras Priyankar Upadhyaya 8. Islamist

Extremism and Terror Network in Bangladesh Smruti S.

Pattanaik 9. Religious Radicalism in Bangladesh: Security

Challenges to India C.A. Josukutty 10. Hizb ut-Tahrir: The

Destabilising Force in Central Asia Mahesh R. Debata

11. Islamic Radicalism in Central Asia Murat Laumulin

12. Islam in Contemporary Tajikistan: Role of Muslim

Leaders Muzaffar Olimov 13. Ethnic-Religious Separatism

in Xinjiang: Challenge to China’s Security K. Warikoo

October 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57590-4: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Asian Security Studies

Series edited by Sumit Ganguly, Indiana

University, USA and Andrew Scobell,

RAND Corporation, Washington DC, USA

Few regions of the world are fraught with as

many security questions as Asia. This series

publishes the best possible scholarship on

the security issues affecting the region, and

includes detailed empirical studies,

theoretically oriented case studies and

policy-relevant analyses as well as more

general works.

Forthcoming in 2011

Autonomy and Ethnic Conflict

in South and South-East Asia

Rajat Ganguly, Murdoch University, Australia

This book addresses the question as to whether

territorial or regional autonomy can offer a viable option

for the pacific settlement of intractable nationalist and

secessionist ethnic conflicts in South and SE Asia.

Selected Contents: 1. Is Autonomy a Solution or an

Obstacle to Resolving Separatist Ethnic Conflicts? Rajat

Ganguly 2. Ethnic Peacemaking in Sri Lanka: The Politics

of Autonomy Solution P. Sahadevan 3. Limits of Autonomy:

Cross-Border Demographic Dynamics and Ethnic Conflict in

Assam, India Sanjib Baruah 4. Addressing Different Aspirations

in Jammu and Kashmir: From Autonomy to Self-Rule D. Suba

Chandran 5. Ending the War in Aceh: Leadership, Money

and Autonomy in Yudhoyono’s Indonesia Marcus Mietzner

6. When Autonomy is Not an Option? Governing Violence in

Southern Thailand Chaiwat Satha-Anand 7. The Pitfalls in

Working for Peace in a Time of Political Decay in the Philippines

Nathan Quimpo 8. Conclusion Rajat Ganguly. Bibliography

March 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57016-9: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Crime-Terror Nexus

in South Asia

States, Security and Non-state Actors

Ryan Clarke, Nanyang Technological University,


This book examines the crime-terror nexus in South Asia,

focusing in particular on the activities of non-state actors

that operate out of Pakistan, and challenges the

conventional wisdom that the Pakistan Taleban (TTP) and

Al-Qaeda are Pakistan’s most serious security threats.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Misgovernance and

Proxy Warfare in Kashmir: Laying the Groundwork for the

Crime-Terror Nexus 3. The Crime-Terror Nexus and Chinese

Arms in Indian-held Kashmir 4. Lashkar-i-Taiba: The Fallacy of

Subservient Proxies and the Future of Islamist Terrorism in India

5. LeT and D-Company in Pakistan: Selective Justice,

Sectarianism and Artificial Distinctions 6. Breakdown of Order

in FATA: Driven by the Pakistani Taliban and Al-Qaeda but

ideologically Underwritten by LeT 7. The Pakistani Economy:

Imbalances and Contradictions, Incomplete Islamisation and

D-Company as a Strategic Asset 8. Conclusion. Bibliography

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-61031-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:



China, Europe and

International Security

Interests, Roles, and Prospects

Edited by Frans-Paul van der Putten, Netherlands

Institute of International Relations and Chu

Shulong, Tsinghua University, China

This book examines the roles played by China and

Europe in the domain of international security in the

21st century.

Selected Contents: Introduction Frans-Paul van der Putten

and Chu Shulong 1. Europe’s Views on China’s Role in

International Security May-Britt Stumbaum 2. China’s Views

on Europe’s Role in International Security Zhang Yanbin

3. Bilateral Security Relations between China and Europe

Wang Bo 4. Space and Defence Technology in European-

Chinese Security Relations Nicola Casarini 5. Hegemonic

Cycles and Sino-European Cooperation in Global Governance

Xuan Xingzhang and Yang Xiaoping 6. US-China-Europe

Security Relations: The Global Security Structure and Order in

the Twenty-First Century Chu Shulong and Chen Songchuan

7. China, Europe and Russia Feng Feng 8. The European

Union and East Asian Security: Prepared for the Future?

Gudrun Wacker 9. Cooperation and Competition on the

Iran Nuclear Dispute: The Role of the European Union and

China Willem van Kemenade 10. Chinese and European

Engagement in UN Peace Operations Janka Oertel

11. Europe Sails East, China Sails West: Somali Piracy and

Shifting Geopolitical Relations in the Indian Ocean Susanne

Kamerling and Frans-Paul van der Putten. Conclusion

Frans-Paul van der Putten and Chu Shulong

September 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58580-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84460-1

For more information, visit:


US-China-EU Relations

Managing the New World Order

Edited by Robert Ross, Harvard University, USA,

Øystein Tunsjø, Norwegian Insititute of Defence

Studies, Norway and Zhang Tuosheng, China

Foundation for International & Strategic Studies, China

This volume brings together a

group of leading international

scholars to discuss how

US-China-EU relations will

shape the future of

international politics.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction

Part 1 2. The United States and

the Future Global Order 3. On

China’s Concept of the International

Security Order 4. The European

Union as Civilian Power: Aspirations,

Potential, Achievements Part 2

5. Changes and Continuities in EU-China Relations: A

German Perspective 6. Travelling Hopefully, Acting Realistically?

UK-China Interactions 7. China and European Security and

Economic Interests: A French Perspective 8. China and US

Security and Economic Interests: Challenges and

Opportunities 9. An Analysis of Chinese Images of the

United States and EU Part 3 10. China-US-EU Relationship

in a Changing Era 11. Strategy, Politics, and World Order

Perspective: Comparing the EU and US Approaches to

China’s Resurgence Part 4 12. Global Imbalances and

Currency Politics: China, Europe and the United States

13. Managing Tension and Promoting Cooperation:

US-Europe Approaches on Security Issues with China

14. US-China-EU Relations: Towards a New World Order?

February 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55233-2: £80.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86020-5

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

regioNal seCuriTy: asia 23


International Conflict

in the Asia-Pacific

Patterns, Consequences and Management

Jacob Bercovitch, University of Canterbury,

New Zealand and Mikio Oishi

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This book analyses four major long-standing and

intractable conflicts in the Asia-Pacific region (the Korean

Peninsula; the Taiwan Strait; the South China Sea (Spratly

Islands); and India-Pakistan), and aims to identify the

mechanisms used to manage these conflicts.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Conflicts in the Asia-Pacific

Region in the Post-World War II Period 2. Conflict Management

and its Application to Conflicts in the Asia-Pacific Region

3. Management of Conflict on the Korean Peninsula: From

Confrontation to Sustaining a Failing State 4. Management

of the Rivalry across the Taiwan Strait: Addressing the

Transformation from Ideological Rivalry to Ethnic Conflict

5. Management of Dispute over the Spratly Islands: Taming

a Dragon in the South China Sea 6. Management of the

Indo-Pakistani Conflict: Siamese Twins Inflicting Lethal Blows

on Each Other 7. Conclusion. Bibliography

May 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58004-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84708-4

For more information, visit:



Changing Power Relations

in Northeast Asia

Implications for Relations between

Japan and South Korea

Edited by Marie Soderberg, Stockholm Economics

School, Sweden

Series: European Institute of Japanese Studies East

Asian Economics and Business Series

The aim of this book is to analyse the Japan-South

Korean relationship from various angles such as politics,

security, economics, culture and immigration issues and

how the relationship is affected by the changing power

relations in Northeast Asia.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Japan–South Korea

Relations at a Crossroads Marie Söderberg 2. How Can

We Cope with Historical Disputes? The Japanese and South

Korean Experience Kan Kimura 3. A Whirlpool of Historical

Controversies in Widening Waters of Cooperation Cheol Hee

Park 4. Japan and the Two Koreas: The Foreign Policy Power

of Domestic Politics T.J. Pempel 5. Historical Memory versus

Democratic Reassurance: The Security Relationship between

Japan and South Korea Paul Midford 6. Hallyu: New

Politico-Cultural Discourse in East Asia? Ingyu Oh

7. Lingering Memory Problems: Compromising Hearts

and Resentful Resistance Mikyoung Kim 8. Substituting

Multilateralism, Guiding Trilateralism: The Japan–ROK

Investment Agreement in the Growing East Asian

Regionalism Yoichiro Sato 9. The Struggle for a Decent Life

in Japan: The Korean Minority Adapting to Changing Legal

and Political Conditions Marie Söderberg 10. A Multilayered

Analysis of Japan–South Korea Relations Marie Söderberg

December 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58747-1: £75.00

For more information, visit:



regioNal seCuriTy: asia

Forthcoming in 2011

ASEAN Regionalism

Co-operation, Values and Institutionalisation

Christopher Roberts, University of Canberra, Australia

Series: Routledge Security in Asia Pacific Series

This book examines the key motivations for and challenges

to greater regional integration in Southeast Asia. It

demonstrates how security and economic concerns –

domestic, regional and international – have either

contributed to, or detracted from, an increased level of

unity and cooperation in ASEAN. It also explores how the

patterns of interaction and socialization generated by

these issues, together with the nature of domestic political

systems, have affected the emergence of common values,

norms and interests. It covers the full range of issues

confronting ASEAN at present, and the full range of

ASEAN countries, and discusses both developments in

ASEAN to date and also likely future developments.

April 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49001-6: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Strategic Partnerships

in Asia

Balancing Without Alliances

Vidya Nadkarni, University of San Diego, USA

This book examines the

nature and implications of the

increasing interaction among

three secondary powers in the

world: China, Russia and India.

It provides an in-depth analysis

of the complex and often

contradictory goals underlying

their emerging strategic

partnerships along with an

assessment of the role these

partnerships play in the larger

regional and global contexts.

In particular, it focuses on the important region of Asia/

Eurasia, where these countries seek to increase their

influence and compete against the prominence of

the United States.

January 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77774-2: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77775-9: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Japan’s Security Identity

From a Peace-State to an International-State

Bhubhindar Singh, University of Sheffield, UK

Series: Sheffield Centre for Japanese Studies/Routledge


This book examines Japanese post-Cold War security

policy, analysing how Japan reacted to the end of the

Cold war, the results of the transformation in the

post-Cold War security environment, and exactly how

Japanese security has changed from its cold war design.

June 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46336-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:



China’s Multilateral

Co-operation in Asia

and the Pacific

Institutionalizing Beijing’s ’Good

Neighbour Policy’

Chien-peng Chung, Lingnan University, Hong Kong

Series: Politics in Asia

Explores the meaning, scope and repercussion in the

drive that a rising China has for institutionalizing

multilateral cooperative processes in the Asia-Pacific

region, the extent to which its actions are motivated by

concerns of politics, economics or security, and the

obstacles it faces for so doing.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. China’s Good

Neighbor Policy 3. China’s Approaches to Asia-Pacific

Economic Cooperation 4. China’s Approaches to the ASEAN

Regional Forum 5. China’s Participation in Shanghai Five and

the Shanghai Cooperation Organization 6. China’s Participation

in the ASEAN plus Three and ASEAN plus China 7. China’s

Participation in the Four-Party Talks and Six-Party Talks

8. China Venture into the Pacific 9. Conclusion

June 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56914-9: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85231-6

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Xinjiang and China’s

Rise in Central Asia

Michael Clarke, Griffith University, Australia

Series: Routledge Contemporary China Series

The recent conflict between indigenous Uighurs and

Han Chinese demonstrates that Xinjiang is a major

trouble spot for China, with Uighur demands for

increased autonomy, but where the Chinese are keen

to integrate the province more firmly within China.

This book traces the development of Xinjiang from

the collapse of the Qing empire in the early twentieth

century to the present. It outlines the Chinese policy

of integration, showing how the Chinese have pursued

this through economic development and in-migration of

Han Chinese, and how the policy of integration is related

to China’s concern for security and to its pursuit of

increased power and influence in Central Asia. It shows

how China’s concerns and policies, although pursued

with vigour in recent decades, are of long-standing, and

how domestic problems and policies in Xinjiang have for

a long time been closely bound up with wider

international relations issues.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The ‘Pawn and Pivot’ of

Asia: Xinjiang from the Collapse of the Qing to the Triumph of

Chinese Communism 2. Xinjiang in the People’s Republic of

China: The Resurgence of the State’s Integrationist Project,

1949-1978 3. ‘Stepping from Stone to Stone in a Stream’:

Xinjiang under Deng Xiaoping, 1978-1991 4. A ‘Great Wall

of Steel’ and a ‘New Silk Road’: China’s Response to Resurgent

Central Asian Geopolitics and Ethnic Minority Opposition in

Xinjiang, 1991-2000 5. ‘Taking Advantage of Misfortune’:

Xinjiang and China’s Rise in Post-9/11 Central Asia, 2001-2009

6. Conclusion

January 2011: 234 x 156: 288pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58456-2: £85.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Routledge Handbook of

Japanese Politics

Edited by Alisa Gaunder, Southwestern University,


The Routledge Handbook of

Japanese Politics is an advanced

level reference guide which

surveys the current state of

Japanese Politics, featuring both

traditional topics and cutting

edge research.

Selected Contents:

Part 1: Domestic Politics

Part 2: Civil Society Part 3: Social

Policy Part 4: Political Economy

Part 5: International Relations and


April 2011: 246 x 174: 400pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55137-3: £110.00

For more information, visit:


Japan’s Remilitarisation

Christopher W. Hughes

Series: Adelphi series

Is Japan on a path towards

assuming a greater military role

internationally, or has the recent

military normalisation ground to

a halt since the premiership of

Junichiro Koizumi? In this book,

Christopher W. Hughes assesses

developments in defence

expenditure, civil–military

relations, domestic and

international military–industrial

complexes, Japan’s procurement

of regional and global

power-projection capabilities, the expansion of US–Japan

cooperation, and attitudes towards nuclear weapons,

constitutional revision and the use of military force.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The Trajectory of Japan’s

Remilitarisation 2. Japan’s Military Doctrine, Expenditure and

Power Projection 3. The Transformation of Civilian Control

4. Japan’s Military-Industrial Complex 5. Japan’s External

Military Commitments 6. The Erosion of Japan’s Anti-militaristic

Principles. Conclusion: Japan’s Remilitarisation: Implications

and Future Directions. Appendix: Tables and Charts

2009: 234 x 156: 188pp

Pb: 978-0-415-55692-7: £9.99

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


The Diplomatic History

of Postwar Japan

Edited by Makoto Iokibe, National Defence

Academy of Japan & Kobe University, Japan

Translated and Annotated by Robert D. Eldridge,

Osaka University, Japan

Winner of the prestigious

Yoshida Shigeru Prize 1999 for

the best book in public history

when it was published in it’s

original Japanese, this book

presents a comprehensive and

up-to-date overview of Japan’s

international relations from the

end of the Pacific War to the

present. Written by leading

Japanese authorities on the

subject, it makes extensive use

of the most recently declassified

Japanese documents, memoirs, and diaries. It introduces

the personalities and approaches Japan’s postwar leaders

and statesmen took in dealing with a rapidly changing

world and the challenges they faced. Importantly, the

book also discusses the evolution of Japan’s presence on

the international stage and the important – if

underappreciated role – Japan has played.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Japanese Diplomacy from

Prewar to Postwar Iokibe Makoto 1. Diplomacy in Occupied

Japan: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1940s Iokibe Makoto

2. The Conditions of an Independent State: Japanese

Diplomacy in the 1950s Sakamoto Kazuya 3. The Model

of an Economic Power: Japanese Diplomacy in the 1960s

Tadokoro Masayuki 4. Overcoming the Crises: Japanese

Diplomacy in the 1970s Nakanishi Hiroshi 5. The Mission

and Trials of an Emerging International State: Japanese

Diplomacy in the 1980s Murata Koji 6. Japanese Diplomacy

After the Cold War Iokibe Makoto. Conclusion: What was

Postwar Japanese Diplomacy?

August 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49847-0: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-49848-7: £25.95

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Southeast Asia and

the Rise of China

Ian Storey, Asia-Pacific Center for Security Studies,

Hawaii, USA

This book examines ASEAN-Chinese relations over recent

years, showing how worries about China’s developing

role have been a significant factor in shaping the nature

of ASEAN and its policies.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. ASEAN’s Relations with

the PRC during the Cold War: From Hostility to Alignment

2. ASEAN-China Relations in the Post-Cold War Era

3. ASEAN and the Engagement of China 4. Indonesia

5. Malaysia 6. Singapore 7. Thailand 8. The Philippines

9. Brunei 10. Vietnam 11. Burma/Myanmar 12. Cambodia

13. Laos. Conclusion

March 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-32621-6: £85.00

For more information, visit:


Routledge Security in Asia

Pacific Series

Series edited by Leszek Buszynski,

International University of Japan and

William Tow, Australian National


This series puts forward important new

work on key security issues in the region.

It embraces the roles of the major actors,

their defense policies and postures and

their security interaction over the key

issues of the region.

Forthcoming in 2011

The East Asian Security


Donna Weeks, University of the Sunshine Coast,


This book examines the concept of ‘security community’

as put forward by international relations theorists, and

explores how such a concept might be applied in practice

in East Asia. It also discusses various international

organisations in Asia, including ASEAN.

Selected Contents: Acknowledgements/Preface.

Introduction 1. Framing a Security Community in the

Asia-Pacific Region 2. Securing Community—Japan’s ‘in/

security’ and the Region 3. Reframing Security: Japan’s

Tentative Re-Engagement 4. When a Security Community

Can Work: Australia and Japan in Iraq 5. From Bilateral to

Multilateral: Japan and the East Asia Community 6. The Next

Step: The Six-Party Talks 7. Security Communities, Trust and

the Asia-Pacific Security Environment. Conclusion.

Bibliography. Index

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49448-9: £80.00

For more information, visit:



India and the South Asian

Strategic Triangle

Ashok Kapur, University of Waterloo, Canada

This book traces the triangular strategic relationship of

India, Pakistan and China over the second half of the

twentieth century, and shows how two enmities – Sino-

Indian and Indo-Pakistani – and one friendship – Sino-

Pakistani – defined the distribution of power and the

patterns of relationships in a major centre of

international conflict and international change.

November 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-45466-7: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

regioNal seCuriTy: asia 25

Southeast Asia and the

Rise of Chinese and Indian

Naval Power

Between Rising Naval Powers

Edited by Sam Bateman and Joshua Ho, both

at Nanyang Technological University, Singapore

This book examines the emerging maritime security

scene in Southeast Asia, considering the highly topical

implications for the region of possible strategic

competition between rising naval powers China and

India with a possible naval ’arms race’ emerging both

with naval force development and operations.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Regional Strategic Environment:

Contemporary Regional Relations Part 2: Contemporary

Regional Maritime Security

April 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55955-3: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

South Asia’s Nuclear Security

Bhumitra Chakma, University of Hull, UK

This book examines the dynamics of nuclear deterrence

in the Second Nuclear Age. It focuses on South Asia, as

it is the most dominant and, to some, the most

dangerous case of contemporary nuclear stand-off,

where deterrence can fail.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Section 1 2. Nuclear

Deterrence and South Asia Section 2 3. Nuclear Postures of

India and Pakistan. Nuclear Use Doctrines. Command and

Control Systems 4. Nuclear Deterrence: Pre-Tests Era.

Ambiguity and Opacity 5. Nuclear Deterrence: Post-Tests Era.

Deterrence Stability and Nuclear Learning. Challenges to the

South Asian Deterrence System. Stability-Instability Paradox

6. Contending Perspectives on South Asia’s Nuclear

Deterrence. Two Views. Counting the Cost of Nuclear

Deterrence. The Future of Indo-Pakistani Nuclear Arms Race

Section 3 7. Nuclear Arms Control in South Asia.

Confidence Building Measures. A Nuclear Restraint Regime

for South Asia 8. Conclusions

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49449-6: £80.00

For more information, visit:



Human Security in

Southeast Asia

Yukiko Nishikawa, Mahidol University, Thailand

There is a growing interest in human security in

Southeast Asia. This book firstly explores the theoretical

and conceptual basis of human security, before focusing

on the region itself. It shows how human security has

been taken up as a central part of security policy in

individual states in Southeast Asia, as well as in the

regional security policy within the Association of

Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN).

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Human Security: A New

Label for Old Challenges? 2. Human Security in Southeast

Asia at a Turning Point 3. Domestic Challenges for Human

Security 4. Regional Challenges for Human Security 5. The

ASEAN Way and Human Security. Conclusion

July 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47868-7: £80.00

For more information, visit:



regioNal seCuriTy: euroPe




Forthcoming in 2011

The Routledge Handbook

of European Security

Edited by Sven Biscop, Royal Institute

for International Relations, Belgium and

Richard Whitman, University of Bath, UK

This new Handbook brings together key experts on

European security from the academic and policy worlds

to examine the European Union (EU) as an international

security actor. While the focus is on the politico-military

dimension, security will be put in the context of the

holistic approach advocated by the EU.

The volume is organized in five parts:

• Part 1 offers a historical overview of the development

of European security institutions and an assessment of

today’s multipolar order. It analyzes the holistic ’grand

strategy’ underlying EU policies and assesses whether

a European strategic culture has emerged.

• Part 2 looks at the institutions that make and

implement policy in the different dimensions covered

by the ’grand strategy’; charts the instruments and

means at their disposal; and assesses to which extent

’sub-strategies’ in each area are linked up with the

overall objectives put forward in the ESS.

• Part 3 then assesses the effectiveness of the actual

policies and actions undertaken, putting the

politico-military dimension in the context of the

holistic approach.

• Part 4 analyzes the role of partnerships with other

actors in these policies.

• Part 5 offers a theoretical perspective on all of these


Selected Contents: Introduction: A Secure Europe in a Better

World - European Security through the EU Part 1: The EU as

an International Security Actor 1. The Emergence of

European Security Institutions (1945-2010) Jolyon Howorth

2. Theoretical Perspective (I): A ’Realist/Traditional’ Perspective

Adrian Hyde-Price 3. Theoretical Perspective (2): A ’Liberal/

Constructivist/Critical’ Perspective Knud Erik Jorgensen 4. The

Age of Interpolarity Giovanni Grevi 5. The European Security

Strategy Sven Biscop 6. European Strategic Culture Christoph

O. Meyer Part 2: Institutions, Instruments and Means

7. CFSP and Diplomacy Geoffrey Edwards 8. Military ESDP

Daniel Keohane 9. Civilian ESDP Catriona Gourlay

10. Industry and Technology Jan Joel Andersson

11. Democracy and Human Rights Richard Youngs

12. Security and Development Jan Orbie Part 3: Policies

13. The Balkans Michael Merlingen 14. Eastern

Neighbourhood and Russia Hiski Haukkala 15. Southern

Neighbourhood (including the Middle East) Costanza Musu

16. Iran and the Gulf Walter Posch 17. Sub-Sahara Africa

Richard Whitman 18. Asia (including Central Asia) Eva Gross

19. New Geopolitical Horizons: Maritime, the Arctic James

Rogers 20. Terrorism Wyn Rees 21. Non-proliferation, Arms

Control and Disarmament Gerrard Quille 22. Energy Sami

Andoura Part 4: Partners 23. NATO and the US Leo Michel

24. The UN Richard Gowan 25. The OSCE Oleksandr Pavlyuk

26. The African Union Malte Brosig 27. Strategic Partners:

The BRICs and Others Thomas Renard. Bibliography

June 2011: 246 x 174: 384pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58828-7: £110.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

European Union Security

From Cold War to Terror War

Steve Marsh, University of Cardiff, UK and

Wyn Rees, University of Nottingham, UK

A new and comprehensive guide to the European

Union’s role and development in European security since

the end of the Cold War, which explores the interface

between the EU and other organizations and states,

specifically NATO, the US and Russia.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction The EC and Cold War

Security and Conceptual Issues of Actors and Security

Part 1: EU Post-Cold War Foreign and Security Policy

Adaptation 2. EU Competence and Post-Cold War

Adaptation 3. Britain 4. France 5. Germany 6. Anglo-

Franco-German Relationship 7. US Foreign Policy Towards

Europe Part 2: Contemporary EU Security Issues

8. Immigration and Asylum 9. Environmental Security

10. Interventionism 11. Institutional Synergy Part 3: The

EU and Post-Cold War Security Crises 12. The Balkans

13. Stabilizing Central and Eastern Europe 14. Iraq 15. The

’War’ on Terrorism 16. Conclusion: Capability, Competence

and Confidence

March 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-34122-6: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-34123-3: £20.99

For more information, visit:


EU Conflict Management

Edited by James Hughes, London School

of Economics, London, UK

Series: Association for the Study of Nationalities

The EU’s self promotion as a ‘conflict manager’ is

embedded in a discourse about its ‘shared values’ and

their foundation in a connection between security,

development and democracy. This book provides a

collection of essays based on the latest cutting edge

research into the EU’s active engagement in conflict

management. It maps the evolution of EU policy and

strategic thinking about its role, and the development

of its institutional capacity to manage conflicts.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Making of EU

Conflict Management Strategy: Development through

Security? James Hughes 2. Paying for Peace: Comparing

the EU’s Role in the Conflicts in Northern Ireland and Kosovo

James Hughes 3. The EU’s Role in the Cyprus Conflict:

System Failure or Structural Metamorphosis? Christalla

Yakinthou 4. The Stabilization and Association Process in

the Western Balkans: An Effective Instrument of Post-Conflict

Management? Claire Gordon 5. The Role of the EU in the

Reform of Dayton in Bosnia-Herzegovina Sofia Sebastian

6. Was the EU’s Role in Conflict Management in Macedonia

a Success? Zoran Ilievski and Dane Taleski 7. The European

Neighbourhood Policy and Conflict Management: A

Comparison of Moldova and the Caucasus Gwendolyn Sasse

8. Firm in Rhetoric, Compromising in Reality: The EU in the

Israeli–Palestinian Conflict Nathalie Tocci 9. EU Conflict

Management in Africa: The Limits of an International

Actor Catherine Gegout

April 2010: 246 x 174: 150pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56747-3: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

A European Army

Security Strategy and Defence

Integration in Europe

Sven Biscop, Royal Institute for International

Relations, Belgium

Series: Cass Military Studies

This book examines the idea of military integration

in Europe by elaborating on the possible size and

composition of a ‘European army’ and assessing in

detail how it can be achieved.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. EU Ambitions

2. EU Forces 3. EU Command 4. EU Civilian Capabilities

5. EU Partners 6. EU Strategic Culture

April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46625-7: £75.00

For more information, visit:



The European Union, Civil

Society and Conflict

Edited by Nathalie Tocci, Transatlantic Academy,

Washington DC, USA

Series: Routledge/UACES Contemporary European


Explores the EU’s relations with civil society organizations

in an effort to improve the effectiveness and relevance

of its conflict and peace policies.

Selected Contents: 1. The European Union, Civil Society

and Conflict: An Analytical Framework Nathalie Tocci

2. Civil Society and Conflict Resolution in Abkhazia,

Nagorno-Karabakh, Transnistria, Israel-Palestine and Western

Sahara Nona Mikhelidze and Nicoletta Pirozzi 3. Conflict

Transformation by Civil Society in the European

Neighbourhood: Towards a New Impact Assessment

Framework Natalia Mirimanova 4. The EU and Civil Society

in the Georgian-Abkhaz Conflict Nicu Popescu 5. Engaging

Civil Society in the Nagorno Karabakh Conflict: What Role

for the EU and its Neighbourhood Policy? Licínia Simão

6. The EU and Moldova’s Civil Society: Partners in Solving the

Transnistria Conflict? George Dura 7. Coming too Late? The

EU’s Mixed Approaches in Transforming the Israeli-Palestinian

Conflict Through Civil Society Benoit Challand 8. Civil

Society as the Continuation of War? The EU and Conflict

Transformation in Western Sahara Hakim Darbouche 9. The

EU, Civil Society and Conflict Transformation: A Comparative

Analysis Nathalie Tocci and Nona Mikhelidze

December 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59671-8: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Forthcoming in 2011

European Security Governance

in Transition

Changing of the Guard

Ursula Schroeder, Free University Berlin, Germany

Series: Security and Governance

Analyses the emergence of new forms of security

governance in Europe in response to changing domestic

and external challenges.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Dual

Transformation of the State Monopoly on Violence

3. The Organizational Basis of European Security 4. The EU’s

Security Policy Machinery 5. Europe’s Fight against Terrorism

6. EU Crisis Management: Dealing with the Aftermath of

Violent Conflict 7. Conclusions: Limits of Convergence

February 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60159-7: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The EU and Counter-Terrorism

Politics, Polity and Policies after 9/11

Javier Argomaniz, University of St. Andrews, UK

Series: Contemporary Terrorism Studies

This book offers a theoretically informed analysis of how

coherently the European Union fights terrorism in the

post-9/11 era.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Politics

2. Post-9/11 Institutionalisation of European Union

Counter-Terrorism Part 2: Polity 3. The Institutional

Framework of EU Counter-terrorism 4. Institutional

Consistency Part 3: Policies 5. The EU Counter-Terror Policy

Response 6. Horizontal Consistency 7. Vertical Consistency

8. Conclusion: Institutionalisation, Consistency Weaknesses

and Implications. Bibliography

January 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56525-7: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86170-7

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Security Challenges in

the Euro-Med Area in

the 21st Century

Mare Nostrum

Stephen Calleya, University of Malta

Series: Routledge Advances in European Politics

This book provides an empirical analysis of security

challenges in the Euro-Mediterranean area and

highlights the political, military, economic, societal and

environmental issues that are already serving as a source

of instability in the region.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Overview of Security

Challenges in the Euro-Mediterranean Area 2. Regional

Relations in the Euro-Med Area 3. Security Challenges in the

Mediterranean 4. Regional Initiatives in the Euro-Mediterranean

Area 5. Geo-Strategic Scenarios in the Euro-Mediterranean

Area 6. Looking Ahead: Policy Recommendations for

Enhancing Co-operative Euro-Mediterranean Relations

June 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56625-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Kosovo, Intervention and


The International Community and the

Transition to Independence

Edited by Aidan Hehir, University of Westminster, UK

Series: Routledge Studies in Intervention and


This book examines international engagement with

Kosovo since NATO’s intervention in 1999, and looks

at the three distinct phases of Kosovo’s development;

intervention, statebuilding and independence.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Kosovo and the

International Community Aidan Hehir 2. Responding to

Kosovo’s Call for Humanitarian Intervention: Public Opinion,

Partisanship, and Policy Objectives Alynna J. Lyon and Mary

Fran T. Malone 3. Kosovo and the Advent of Sovereignty as

Responsibility Alex Bellamy 4. Conflicting Rules: Global

Constitutionalism and the Kosovo Intervention Anthony F. Lang,

Jr 5. De Facto States in the Balkans: Shared Governance versus

Ethnic Sovereignty in Republika Srpska and Kosovo Rick Fawn

and Oliver P. Richmond 6. Policing the State of Exception in

Kosovo Barry J. Ryan 7. Explaining the International

Administration’s Failures in the Security and Justice Areas

Giovanna Bono 8. Kosovo – The Final Frontier? From

Transitional Administration to Transitional Statehood James

Gow 9. Kosovo, Sovereignty and the Subversion of UN

Authority James Kerr-Lindsey 10. Microcosm, Guinea Pig or

Sui Generis? Assessing International Engagement with Kosovo

Aidan Hehir. Appendix: Interview with Dr Fatmir Sejdiu,

President of the Republic of Kosovo

January 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56167-9: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86179-0

For more information, visit:


relaTed jourNal

African Security Review

New to Routledge in 2010

Co-published with UNISA Press

Editor: Deane-Peter Baker, United States

Naval Academy, USA

African Security

Review, the

respected quarterly

journal of the

Institute for

Security Studies,

creates an essential

forum for African

perspectives and

practitioner insights,

as well as the best

of international

scholarship, to inform and influence security

policy and practice.

It publishes thought-provoking and highly

relevant articles on the spectrum of human

security issues, including security sector

transformation, civil-military relations, crime,

justice and corruption, small arms control,

peace support initiatives and conflict

management, as well as papers dealing with

the interplay between economics, politics,

society and culture with human security

and stability.

For more information on the journal, including

subscription details, please visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

regioNal seCuriTy:

Middle easT & aFriCa



Middle easT

& aFriCa

Forthcoming in 2011

Routledge Handbook

of Political Islam

Edited by Shahram Akbarzadeh, University

of Melbourne, Australia

This Handbook provides a multidisciplinary overview of

one of the key political movements of our time. Drawing

on the expertise from some of the top scholars in the

world it examines theoretical and historical backgrounds,

terrorism, strategy, case studies of Islamist movements in

the developing world and the West, and the relationship

with democracy and gender issues.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Political Thoughts

of Seyyed Qutb 3. The Emerging Political Philosophy of

Contemporary Islamism 4. Muslim Brotherhood 5. Hamas

between Pragmatism and Radicalism 6. Velayat-e Faqih

7. Hizbullah in Lebanon 8. Hizb ut-Tahrir 9. Emergence of

Political Islam in Central Asia 10. Preserving Muslim Identity

under Secular Rule in Turkey 11. Merging Islam and Democracy

in Iran? 12. Rise of Islamism in Pakistan 13. Limits of Islamic

Legitimacy in Saudi Arabia 14. Islamic Radicalism in Indonesia

15. The Significance of the Arab Israeli Conflict 16. Islamism

and Political Violence – Al Qaeda 17. The Challenge of Muslim

Integration in the West 18. Radicalism in the United Kingdom

19. Islamic Education as Incubator of Radicalism? 20. Attitude

Towards Women 21. Islamism and the US Policy 22. The Clash

of Civilizations 23. Islam and Modernity

April 2011: 234 x 156: 424pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48473-2: £110.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Somalia: Too Dangerous,

Too Important to Ignore

Edited by Brian J. Hesse, Northwest Missouri State

University, USA

The situation in Somalia today embodies some of the

most pressing issues in international relations. How

should the international community deal with the failed

state that is Somalia? From the presence of al-Qaeda

operatives to pirates, to what extent is Somalia a threat

to global peace and commerce? What are the

humanitarian obligations and realities of the

international community in Somalia? This book sheds

light on all of these topics.

The book is published as a special issue of the Journal

of Contemporary African Studies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: ’Somalia – More than

Clans over Flags Brian Hesse 2. Somalia and its Failed State/

US Foreign Policy Dynamics Ken Mekhaus 3. Somalia and its

Region/Neighbours Osman Farah 4. Somalia and Multilateral

Institutional Relations Ken Rutherford 5. Somalia and Global

Terrorism Shaul Shay 6. Somalia and Global Piracy Roger

Middleton 7. Conclusion: ’Where Somalia Works – And

Other Lessons Going Forward’ Brian Hesse

February 2011: 246 x 174: 176pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59463-9: £80.00

For more information, visit:




regioNal seCuriTy: Middle easT & aFriCa

Forthcoming in 2011

Routledge Handbook of the

Israeli-Palestinian Conflict

Edited by David Newman, Ben-Gurion University

of the Negev, Israel and Joel Peters, Virginia Tech

University, USA

This Handbook provides a comprehensive and accessible

overview of the most contentious and protracted

political issue in the Middle East. The editors have

gathered together a range of the top experts from Israel,

Palestine, Europe and North America to tackle a range of

topics from historical background through to peace

efforts, domestic politics, critical issues such as refugees

and settler movements, and the role of outside players

such as the Arab states, US and EU.

Selected Contents: Section 1: Origins and History

1. Palestinian Nationalism Ahmad Khalidi 2. Zionism Colin

Schindler 3. Israeli Narratives on the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict

Paul Scham 4. Palestinian Narratives on the Israeli-Palestinian

Conflict Walid Salem Section 2: Critical Junctures 5. 1948

War: Origins and Consequences Kristen Schulze 6. 1967 War:

Origins and Consequences Joel Peters 7. The Oslo Declaration

Daniel Levy 8. The Palestinian Intifadahs Rami Nasrallah

9. Camp David Joel Peters Section 3: Seeking Peace

10. Peace Plans: 1967-1993 Laura Zittrain Eisenberg

11. Peace Plans 1993-2008 Galia Golan Section 4: Domestic

Society and Actors 12. The Israeli Settler Movement David

Newman 13. Palestinian Citizens of Israel Amal Jamal

14. Israeli Peace Movement Naomi Chazan 15. The PLO Nigel

Parsons 16. The Palestinian Authority Nigel Parsons 17.

Hamas Khaled Hroub 18. Palestinian Civil Society Michael

Schulz Section 5: Critical Issues 19. Refugees Rex Brynen

20. Jerusalem Michael Dumper 21. Borders and Territory

David Newman 22. Unilateralism and Separation Gerald

Steinberg 23. Terrorism and Political Violence Magnus Norell

24. Economic Relations Arie Arnon 25. Human Rights Edy

Kaufman 26. Religion and the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict

Yehezkel Landau 27. Water and the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict

Julie Trottier Section 6: International and Regional

Involvement 28. Jewish Diapora Dov Waxman 29. The

United States and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Steven Spiegel

30. Russia and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Robert Freedman

31. Europe and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict Rosy Hollis 32. The

Arab World and Israeli-Palestinian Conflict D.R. Kumaraswamy

March 2011: 246 x 174: 424pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77862-6: £110.00

For more information, visit:



Arms Control and Proliferation

in the Middle East

Overcoming the Security Dilemma

Edited by Bernd W. Kubbig, Peace Research

Institute, Frankfurt, Germany

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This edited volume provides a comprehensive, systematic

and innovative analysis of the missile threat/proliferation

issue in the Middle East.

December 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60111-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Adelphi series

Iran under Ahmadinejad

The Politics of Confrontation

Ali M. Ansari

Series: Adelphi series

This book looks at the details of

Ahmadinejad’s political rise and

assesses his presidency to date

within the context of the

dynamics of Iranian politics. The

author argues that Ahmadinejad

is very much a product of the

social and political changes

which have occurred since the

end of the Iran–Iraq War; that

his populism represents an ad

hoc, and somewhat incoherent,

attempt to disguise the growing

contradictions which afflict the Islamic Republic, and the

conservative vision of an unaccountable Islamic autocracy

in the face of growing dissatisfaction, especially among

key sections of the élite.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: The Background

to Ahmadinejad’s Rise 1. The Rafsanjani and Khatami

Presidencies 2. The Triumph of the Authoritarians

Part 2: The ‘Third Islamic Revolution’ 3. The Ahmadinejad

Presidency: Image and Foreign Policy 4. The Ahmadinejad

Presidency: Domestic Policy. Conclusion

2007: 234 x 156: 104pp

Pb: 978-0-415-45486-5: £17.99

For more information, visit:


Iraq’s Sunni Insurgency

Ahmed S. Hashim, University of New South Wales,


From 2003 to 2008, the Sunni

Arab insurgency in Iraq posed a

key challenge to political stability

in the country and to Coalition

objectives there. This book

explains the onset, composition

and evolution of this insurgency.

It begins by addressing both

its immediate and deeper

sociopolitical origins, and goes

on to examine the multiple

ideological strands within the

insurgency and their often

conflicting methods and goals.

2009: 234 x 156: 89pp

Pb: 978-0-415-46655-4: £15.99

For more information, visit:


Iraq’s Future

The Aftermath of Regime Change

Toby Dodge

2005: 234 x 156: 112pp

Pb: 978-0-415-36389-1: £18.99

For more information, visit:


Iraq’s Future investigates the

difficult and costly regime

change in Baghdad, taking into

account US troops, the new

Iraqi government and the future

of state-building. The book

describes what is involved in

building a new government

from scratch.

The Iranian Nuclear Crisis

Avoiding Worst-Case Outcomes

Mark Fitzpatrick

This book explains how Iran

has developed its nuclear

programme to the point where

it threatens to achieve a

weapons capability within a

short time frame, and analyses

Western policy responses aimed

at forestalling that capability.

Selected Contents: Introduction

1. Framing the Problem: Iran’s

Pursuit of Fissile Material

2. Western Strategy So Far

3. Can Iran’s Capability Be

Kept Non-Weaponised? Conclusion

2008: 234 x 156: 100pp

Pb: 978-0-415-46654-7: £15.99

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


Surveillance and Control

in Israel/Palestine

Population, Territory and Power

Edited by Elia Zureik and David Lyon, both at

Queen’s University, Canada and Yasmeen Abu-

Laban, University of Alberta, Canada

Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Politics

Surveillance is always a means to an end, whether that

end is influence, management or entitlement. This book

examines the several layers of surveillance that control

the Palestinian population in Israel and the occupied

territories, showing how they operate, how well they

work, how they are augmented, and how in the end

their chief purpose is population control.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction Part 2: Theories

of Surveillance in Conflict Zones Part 3: Civilian Surveillance

Part 4: Political Economy and Globalization of Surveillance

Part 5: Citizenship Criteria and State Construction

Part 6: Surveillance, Racialization, and Uncertainty

Part 7: Territory and Population Management in Conflict Zones

Part 8: Social Ordering, Biopolitics and Profiling

December 2010: 234 x 156: 400pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58861-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


The Politics and Security

of the Gulf

Anglo-American Hegemony and the

Shaping of a Region

Jeffrey R. Macris, US Naval Academy

Since the nineteenth century

the Gulf region has been an

area of intense interest, having

been influenced first by the

British and more recently by the

Americans. This book charts the

changing security and political

priorities of these two powers

and how they have shaped the


Selected Contents: 1. Great

Britain’s Legacy in the Persian Gulf

2. World War II and the Arrival of

the Americans 3. The Early Cold War, the Loss of India, and

Nasser’s Revolt Against the British, 1946–1958 4. The British

Position in the Gulf under Assault 5. America Watches as

the British Birth a New Gulf Order, 1968–1971 6. The

Chaotic Interregnum: America Cries Enough, 1972–1991

7. Pax Americana - Bellum Americanum, 1991–Present.


2009: 234 x 156: 336pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77870-1: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77871-8: £23.99

For more information, visit:



Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

regioNal seCuriTy: Middle easT & aFriCa 29

NATO and the Middle East

The Geopolitical Context Post-9/11

Mohammed Moustafa Orfy, Embassy of Egypt,


Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Politics

Despite having been active in the region since the

mid-1990s, the role of NATO in the Middle East has

attracted particular attention since the events of 11th

September 2001. This book analyses the limits of NATO’s

role in the Middle East region and examines whether or

not the Alliance is able to help in improving the fragile

regional security environment through cooperative links

with select Middle Eastern partners.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The Geopolitical Context

of NATO’s Role in the Middle East 1. Western Interests and

Stability in the Middle East 2. NATO’s New Global Role and

its Relevance to the Middle East 3. NATO’s Role in the Middle

East Before 9/11 4. NATO’s Role in the Middle East Post-9/11

5. The United States and NATO’s Role in the Middle East.

Conclusion: NATO and Security Challenges in the Middle East

September 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59234-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:




Government and Politics of the

Contemporary Middle East

Continuity and Change

Tareq Y. Ismael and Jacqueline S. Ismael, both

at University of Calgary, Canada

This exciting new book for

students of Middle Eastern

politics provides a comprehensive

introduction to the complexities

of the region, its politics and

people. Combining a thematic

framework for examining

patterns of politics with

individual chapters dedicated

to specific countries, the book

explores current issues within

an historical context.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Middle East Politics in

the 21st Century: Patterns of Continuity and Change

Part 1: Dynamics in Middle East Politics 2. The Burden

of History: From Empire to Nation State 3. Legacy of Islam:

Continuity and Change Part 2: Major Governments and

Politics: The Northern Belt 4. The Republic of Turkey

5. The Islamic Republic of Iran with Ali Rezai The Fertile

Crescent 6. The Republic of Iraq with Shereen T. Ismael

7. The Syrian Arab Republic and the Lebanese Republic

8. The State of Israel and the Palestinian National Authority

with Glenn E. Perry West and East of the Red Sea 9. The

Arab Republic of Egypt 10. The Gulf Cooperation Council

September 2010: 234 x 156: 512pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49144-0: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-49145-7: £21.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Iranian Foreign Policy

Past, Present and Future Scenarios

Abbas Maleki, Harvard University, USA

Series: Iranian Studies

This book evaluates the vision,

mission, goals, strategies, policies,

trends and approaches of Iranian

foreign policy since the revolution

through to the present day. It also

provides a range of possible

scenarios for the future.

Selected Contents: 1. Making

Sense of Foreign Policy 2. What is

Iran? 3. Substantial Resources in

Iran’s Foreign Policy 4. Analysis of

Theoretical Challenges of Iran’s

Foreign Policy 5. Decision Making

in Foreign Policy 6. Political Factions in Iran and Foreign

Policy 7. Major Levels of Iran’s Relations with the Rest of the

World 8. Future of Iran’s Foreign Policy 9. Uncertainties on

Global Trends to 2015 10. Scenarios on Iran’s Foreign Policy

February 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43733-2: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-43734-9: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Iran and the International


Edited by Anoush Ehteshami and Reza Molavi,

both at Durham University, UK

Series: Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic

World Series

Much attention in the West has focused on Iran as

a problem. This book goes further however by discussing

how international relations are viewed from inside Iran

itself, outlining the factors which underpin Iranian thinking

on international relations and considering what role Iran,

as a large and significant country in the Middle East,

ought to play in a fairly constructed international system.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Anoush Ehteshami and

Reza Molavi 2. The Ideological and Ethical Foundations of

Iran’s Foreign Policy Ali Akbar Alikhani 3. Political Rationality

of the Islamic Republic of Iran in Comparison with

Contemporary Fundamentalism Morteza Bahrani 4. The

Islamic Republic of Iran and the Ideal International System

Dehghani Firooz-Abadi 5. Peace and Security in the

International System: An Iranian Approach Afshar Efekhari

6. The Islamic Republic of Iran’s Constitution and the

International System Mohammad Bagher Khorramshad

7. Iran and World Order/Disorder: The Future Abbas Maleki

8. The Islamic Republic of Iran and the World International

System Clash with the Domination Paradigm Manouchehr

Mohammadi 9. Two Different Faces of Iran-West Relations:

Incompatibility of Official Levels with Everyday Life Vahid

Shalchi 10. Concluding Remarks Ariabarzan

Mohammadighalehtaki and Eskandar Sadeghi

March 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55966-9: £80.00

For more information, visit:




regioNal seCuriTy: Middle easT & aFriCa

The Kurds and US

Foreign Policy

International Relations in the Middle East

since 1945

Marianna Charountaki, Independent Scholar

Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Politics

This book provides a detailed survey and analysis of

US-Kurdish relations and their interaction with domestic,

regional and global politics. Using the Kurdish issue to

explore the nature of the engagement between

international powers and weaker non-state entities,

the author analyses the existence of an interactive US

relationship with the Kurds.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Multi-Faceted

Nature of the Kurdish Issue 3. US Foreign Policy: Structures,

Determinants and Pressures 4. US Foreign Policy Towards the

Kurds, 1945-1990 5. US Foreign Policy Toward the Kurds,

1991-2003 6. US and the Kurds in the Post-Saddam Era

(2003-2009) 7. Conceptual Implications and General


October 2010: 234 x 156: 320pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58753-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:



The Iran-Iraq War

Antecedents and Conflict Escalation

Jerome Donovan, Swinburne University, Australia

Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Politics

Explaining the systemic nature of conflict within the

Middle East, and specifically between Iran and Iraq, the

book illustrates how IR theory can be utilised in explaining

conflict dynamics in the Middle East. The author’s

integrated approach to understanding interstate conflict

escalation demonstrates that when taken together issues,

interaction and power capabilities lend themselves to a

much richer account of the dyadic relationship between

Iran and Iraq in the lead up to war in 1980.

Addressing a disparity between international relations

and Middle Eastern area studies, this book fills an

important gap in the existing scholarly literature on the

causes of war. As such, it will be of great interest to

scholars of peace and conflict studies, Middle Eastern

studies and International Relations.

December 2010: 216 x 138: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57989-6: £70.00

For more information, visit:



International Law and

the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict

A Rights-Based Approach to Middle

East Peace

Edited by Susan M. Akram, Michael Dumper,

University of Exeter, UK, Michael Lynk, University of

Western Ontario, Canada and Iain Scobbie, School

of Oriental and African Studies, University of

London, UK

The Israeli-Palestinian conflict

has long been intertwined

with, and has had a profound

influence on, the principles of

modern international law.

Placing a rights-based approach

to the Israeli-Palestinian conflict

at the centre of discussions over

its peaceful resolution, this book

provides detailed consideration

of international law and its

application to political issues.

The book illustrates through both theory and practice

how international law points the way to a just and

durable solution to the conflict in the Middle East.

Contributions from leading scholars in their respective

fields give an in-depth analysis of key issues that have

been marginalized in most mainstream discussions of

the Israeli-Palestinian conflict:

• Palestinian refugees

• Jerusalem

• Security

• Legal and political frameworks

• The future of Palestine.

Written in a style highly accessible to the non-specialist,

this book is an important addition to the existing

literature on the subject.

December 2010: 234 x 156: 368pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57322-1: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-57323-8: £25.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Conflict and Peacemaking

in Israel-Palestine

Theory and Application

Sapir Handelman, Harvard University, USA

Series: Routledge Studies in Middle Eastern Politics

Presenting and evaluating interactive models of

peacemaking and the phenomenon of intractable

conflict, the book takes an in-depth look into specific

models for peacemaking and applies them to the

situation in Israel/Palestine.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: General

Background 1. Intractable Conflict as a Complex

Phenomenon 2. The Palestinian-Israeli Conflict

3. Between Conflict-Resolution and Conflict-Management

Part 2: Interactive Models of Peacemaking 4. The

Strong-Leader Model 5. The Social-Reformer Model

6. The Political-Elite Model 7. The Public-Assembly Model.

Summary and Conclusion

January 2011: 216 x 138: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49215-7: £70.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

National Security Law in Israel

Dynamics and Development

Stuart Cohen, Bar-Ilan University, Israel and

Amichai Cohen, Ono Academic College, Israel

Series: Israeli History, Politics and Society

This book analyses both the substance of Israel’s

National security law and the dynamics of its historical

development. It examines the normative principles up on

which Israel’s national security law is based, institutional

arrangements for the formulation and protection of

national security law, and the style in which Israeli

national security law is formulated.

June 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-54914-1: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Islamic Extremism in Kuwait

From the Muslim Brotherhood to Al-Qaeda

and other Islamic Political Groups

Falah Abdullah al-Mdaires, Kuwait University

Series: Durham Modern Middle East and Islamic

World Series

This book is the first to provide

a complete overview of Islamic

extremism in Kuwait. It traces

the development of Islamist

fundamentalist groups in

Kuwait, both Shiite and Sunni,

from the beginning of the

twentieth century.

Selected Contents: 1. The Roots

of the Islamist Political Groups

2. Sunni Islamist Political Groups

3. Shi’ite Islamist Political Groups

4. The Relationships between the

Kuwaiti Regime and the Islamist Political Groups 5. Spread

of the Islamist Political Groups in the Social Body 6. Islamist

Political Groups and Religious Violence, International

Terrorism 7. The Armed Islamist Sunni Jihadist Groups

8. The Armed Islamist Shi’ite Jihadist Groups

April 2010: 234 x 156: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56719-0: £85.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Conflict, Diplomacy and

Society in Israeli-Lebanese


Edited by Efraim Karsh, Michael Kerr and

Rory Miller, all at Kings College London, UK

This book is a wide-ranging and innovative study of

Israeli-Lebanese relations from the birth of the Jewish

state in 1948 to the Israel-Lebanon War of 2006.

Selected Contents: 1. The Evolution of Israeli-Lebanese

Relations: From Implicit Peace to Explicit Conflict Hilal

Khashan 2. Point of Departure: The 1967 War and the Jews

of Lebanon Kirsten E. Schulze 3. ’A Positive Aspect to the

Tragedy of Lebanon’: The Convergence of US, Syrian and

Israeli Interests at the Outset of Lebanon’s Civil War Michael

Kerr 4. History Revisited or Revamped? The Maronite Factor

in Israel’s 1982 Invasion of Lebanon Laurie Eisenberg 5. The

Israeli-Syrian-Lebanese Triangle: The Renewed Struggle over

Lebanon Eyal Zisser 6. Between Israel and Lebanon: The

Druze Intifawda of October 2007 John Maher 7. Lebanon

2006 and the Front of Legitimacy Alan Craig 8. Building

Blocks for a Future Israeli-Lebanese Accord? Adir Waldman

April 2010: 234 x 156: 168pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56063-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


US Strategy in Africa

AFRICOM, Terrorism and Security Challenges

Edited by David J. Francis, University of Bradford, UK

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This book outlines the construction, interpretations and

understanding of US strategy towards Africa in the early

twenty-first century.

Selected Contents: Part 1: AFRICOM and US Security

Policy in Africa 1. Introduction: AFRICOM: US Strategic

Interests and African Security David J. Francis 2. Africa: A

New Strategic Perspective Theresa Whelan 3. AFRICOM:

What is It and what will It do? Daniel Volman 4. AFRICOM:

Terrorism and Security Challenges in Africa J. Peter Pham

5. AFRICOM and Challenges to African Security Mohamed

Salih 6. Solutions Not Yet Sought: A Human Security

Paradigm for the 21st Century Shannon Beebe

Part 2: African Responses: Threats and Opportunities

7. AFRICOM: Its Reality and Future Jeremy Keenan 8. African

Union and AFRICOM Tom Teiku 9. Into Africa - Always

Something New: AFRICOM and the History of Telling Africans

what their Security Problems Are David Chuter 10. AFRICOM

and the New Aid and Security Partnerships Josephine

Osikena. Conclusion: AFRICOM and the future of US

Africa Relations David J. Francis

February 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48510-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85530-0

For more information, visit:



Peacebuilding and Rule of Law

in Africa

Just Peace?

Edited by Chandra Lekha Sriram,

Olga Martin-Ortega and Johanna Herman,

all at University of East London, London, UK

Series: Security and Governance

‘This is a valuable volume from a wide range of

scholars offering not just cogent analysis on

challenges to the rule of law in vulnerable and

post-conflict societies but also insightful policy

recommendations. Scholars and practitioners

equally will find it stimulating and useful.‘

– David M. Malone, International Development

Research Centre, Canada

Selected Contents: 1. Promoting the Rule of Law: From Liberal

to Institutional Peacebuilding Chandra Lekha Sriram, Olga

Martin-Ortega and Johanna Herman 2. Traditional Justice as

Rule of Law in Africa: An Anthropological Perspective Juan

Obarrio 3. The Rule of Law in Liberal Peacebuilding Oliver

Richmond 4. Rule of Law, Peacekeeping and the United

Nations Rob Pulver 5. (Re)creating the Rule of Law, Post

Conflict, in Africa: From Constitutional Protections to Oversight

Mechanisms Muna Ndulo 6. Rule of Law in the Democratic

Republic of Congo Pall Davidsson with Fríða Thoroddsen

7. (Re)building the Rule of Law in Sierra Leone: Beyond the

Formal Sector? Chandra Lekha Sriram 8. Narrowing Gaps in

Justice: Rule of Law Programming in Liberia Johanna Herman

and Olga Martin-Ortega 9. Creating Demand in Darfur: Circling

the Square Sarah Maguire 10. The Anti-Politics of Transitional

Justice: Lessons from Rwanda Stephen Brown 11. Just Peace?

Lessons Learned and Policy Insights Chandra Lekha Sriram,

Olga Martin-Ortega, and Johanna Herman

July 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57736-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84849-4

For more information, visit:



Regional Organizations

in African Security

Edited by Fredrik Soderbaum, University of

Gothenburg, Sweden and Rodrigo Tavares, United

Nations University, Belgium

This book examines the role of regional organizations in

Africa’s security from a theoretical and practical perspective.

It is published as a special issue of African Security.

Selected Contents: 1. Problematizing Regional Organizations

in African Security Fredrik Söderbaum and Rodrigo Tavares

2. The African Union’s New Peace and Security Architecture:

Toward an Evolving Security Regime? Ulf Engel and João Gomes

Porto 3. The African Union’s Peace Operations: A Comparative

Analysis Paul D. Williams 4. Economic Community of West

African States on the Ground: Comparing Peacekeeping in

Liberia, Sierra Leone, Guinea Bissau, and Côte D’Ivoire Cyril I.

Obi 5. Inter-Governmental Authority on Development on the

Ground: Comparing Interventions in Sudan and Somalia Tim

Murithi 6. Regional Conflict Management in Central Africa:

From FOMUC to MICOPAX Angela Meyer 7. Southern African

Development Community as Regional Peacekeeper: Myth or

Reality? Maxi Schoeman and Marie Muller 8. Regional

Organizations in African Security: A Practitioner’s View João

Gomes Cravinho 9. Regional Organizations and African

Security: Moving the Debate Forward James J. Hentz, Fredrik

Söderbaum and Rodrigo Tavares

October 2010: 246 x 174: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59787-6: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

regioNal seCuriTy:

russia aNd easTerN



seCuriTy: russia

aNd easTerN


Forthcoming in 2011

Russian Imperialism Revisited

Neo-Empire, State Interests and

Hegemonic Power

Domitilla Sagramoso, Kings College London, UK

Series: Contemporary Security Studies

By examining Russia’s military, economic, political, and

diplomatic policies towards the former Soviet states since

1991, this book assesses whether Russian leaders have

been able to discard the country’s imperial legacy.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: The Setting:

Russia’s Policies Towards the Near Abroad under

President Yeltsin 1. The Underlying Principles of Russia’s

Policy Towards the ’Near Abroad’ 2. Russia and the

Commonwealth of Independent States 3. Russia’s Role in the

Military Conflicts in the Near Abroad 4. Russia’s Energy Trade

with the former Soviet Space 5. Russian Minorities in the

Baltic States, Ukraine and Kazakhstan Part 2: The Evolution

of Russia’s Policies Towards the ’Near Abroad’ under

President Putin 6. Russia’s Policies Towards the Near Abroad

from 1999 to 2004 7. Russia’s Policies to the Former Soviet

States from 2004 to the Present. Conclusion

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56227-0: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86180-6

For more information, visit:


Russia’s Foreign Security Policy

in the 21st Century

Putin, Medvedev and Beyond

Marcel De Haas, Netherlands Institute of

International Relations Clingendael

Series: Contemporary Security Studies

This book examines Russia’s security policy under the

eight years of Vladimir Putin’s presidency.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. Structure of Putin’s

Foreign Security Policy (2000-2008) 2. Implementation of

Putin’s Foreign Security Policy 3. Structure of Medvedev’s

Foreign Security Policy (2008-2009) 4. Implementation of

Medvedev’s Foreign Security Policy 5. The Russian-Georgian

Armed Conflict of August 2008 6. Assessment of Russia’s

Foreign Security Policy (2000-2009) and Outlook beyond

Medvedev. Bibliography

March 2010: 234 x 156: 232pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47730-7: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85440-2

For more information, visit:





regioNal seCuriTy:

russia aNd easTerN


War and Revolution

in the Caucasus

Georgia Ablaze

Edited by Stephen F. Jones, Mount Holyoke

College, USA

Series: ThirdWorlds

This book takes a different tack

which focuses on the domestic

roots of the August 2008 war.

Collectively the authors in this

volume present a new

multidimensional context for

the war. They analyse historical

relations between national

minorities in the region, look

at the link between democratic

development, state-building,

and war, and explore the role

of leadership and public opinion. Digging beneath often

simplistic geopolitical explanations, the authors give the

national minorities and Georgians themselves, the voice

that is often forgotten by Western analysts.

May 2010: 246 x 174: 176pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56527-1: £75.00

For more information, visit:


The Security Context

in the Black Sea Region

Edited by Dimitrios Triantaphyllou, International

Centre for Black Sea Studies (ICBSS), Greece

This book primarily deals with the role of the regional

and extra-regional actors in security issues in the Black

Sea region. It assesses the security context of the region

in the post-Cold War period and suggests some possible

future developments.

This book was published as a special issue of Southeast

European and Black Sea Studies.

Selected Contents: Preface Dimitrios Triantaphyllou

1. The Security Paradoxes of the Black Sea Region Dimitrios

Triantaphyllou 2. Geopolitics, (sub)Regionalism, Discourse and

a Troubled ‘Power Triangle’ in the Black Sea Yannis Tsantoulis

3. Towards a Comprehensive Regional Security Framework in

the Black Sea Region after the Russia-Georgia War Oksana

Antonenko 4. Geographical Blessing versus Geopolitical Curse:

Great Power Security Agendas for the Black Sea Region and

a Turkish Alternative Mustafa Aydin 5. The Impact of the

Caucasus Crisis on Regional and European Security Nadia

Alexandrova-Arbatova 6. The United States and Security in the

Black Sea Region Stephen F. Larrabee 7. Russian and European

Neighbourhood Policies Compared Andrew Wilson and Nicu

Popescu 8. The European Union and Security in the Black Sea

Region after the Georgia Crisis Sabine Fischer 9. Black Sea

Security as a Regional Concern for the Black Sea States and the

Global Powers Sergiy Glebov 10. Ukraine Needs to Decide its

Strategic Alignment Jeffrey Simon

February 2010: 246 x 174: 184pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56088-7: £80.00

For more information, visit:


CoNFliCT resoluTioN



Handbook of Conflict

Analysis and Resolution

Edited by Dennis J.D. Sandole and

Ingrid Sandole-Staroste, both at George

Mason University, Washington DC, USA and

Jessica Senehi and Sean Byrne, both at

University of Manitoba, Canada,

This major Handbook is a collection of work from leading

scholars in the Conflict Analysis and Resolution (CAR)

field. The central theme is the value of interdisciplinary

approaches to the analysis and resolution of conflicts.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Core Concepts and Theories

1. The Role of Identity in Conflict 2. Encountering Nationalism:

The Contribution of Peace Studies and Conflict Resolution

3. Gender Relations and Conflict Transformation Among

Refugee Women 4. Causation as a Core Concept in Conflict

Analysis 5. The Challenge of Operationalizing Key Concepts in

Conflict Resolution Theory in International and Subnational

Conflicts 6. The Enemy and the Innocent of Violent Conflicts

7. Identity Conflicts: Models of Dynamics and Early Warning

8. Generativity-Based Conflict: Maturing Micro Foundations for

Conflict Theory Part 2: Core Approaches: Conceptual and

Methodological 9. Human Agonistes: Interdisciplinary Inquiry

into Ontological Agency and Human Conflict 10. The

Ethnography of Peace Education: Some Lessons Learned from

Palestinian-Jewish Integrated Education in Israel 11. Waging

Conflicts Constructively 12. A Social-Psychological Approach

to Conflict Analysis and Resolution 13. Building Relational

Empathy Through An Interactive Design Process 14. Building

Peace: Storytelling to Transform Conflicts Constructively 15. A

Capacity Building Approach to Conflict Resolution 16. Gender

Mainstreaming: A Valuable Tool in Building Sustainable Peace

17. Culture Theory, Culture Clash, and the Practice of Conflict

Resolution 18. Conflict Resolution: The Missing Link between

Liberal IR Theory and Realistic Practice 19. Understanding the

Development-Conflict Nexus and the Contribution of

Development Cooperation to Peacebuilding 20. Evaluation

in Conflict Resolution and Peacebuilding 21. Toward a

Conflictology: The Quest for Trans-Disciplinarity Part 3: Core

Practices: Processes 22. Conflict Transformation: Reasons to

be Modest 23. Mediation Frames/Justice Games 24. Interactive

Conflict Resolution: Dialogue, Conflict Analysis and Problem

Solving 25. Mediation and International Conflict Resolution:

Analyzing Structure and Behavior 26. Ethical and Gendered

Dilemmas of Moving from Emergency Response to

Development in ’Failed’ States 27. Memory-Retrieval and

Truth-Recovery 28. Shifting from Coherent Towards Holistic

Peace Processes 29. Law and Legal Processes in Resolving

International Conflicts Part 4: Alternative Voices and

Complex Intervention Designs 30. Restorative Processes

of Peace and Healing within the Governing Structures of the

Rotinonshonni ’Longhouse People’ 31. Critical Systematic

Inquiry in Conflict Analysis and Resolution: An Essential Bridge

between Theory and Practice 32. From Diagnosis to Treatment:

Towards New Shared Principles for Israeli/Palestinian

Peacebuilding 33. Strategies for the Prevention, Management

and/or Resolution of (Ethnic) Crisis and Conflict: The Case of the

Balkans 34. The Perception of Economic Assistance in Northern

Ireland and Its Role in the Peace Process 35. Conflict Resolution

in An Age of Empire: New Challenges to an Emerging Field

Conclusions Conclusion: Revisiting the CAR Field. Epilogue:

Implications for Theory, Research, Practice and Teaching

2008: 246 x 174: 576pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43395-2: £125.00

Pb: 978-0-415-57735-9: £29.99

eBook: 978-0-203-89316-6

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


Democracy Promotion and

Post-Conflict Reconstruction

The United States and Democratic

Consolidation in Bosnia and Afghanistan

Matthew Alan Hill, Cardiff University, Wales

Series: Democratization Studies

This book investigates US foreign policy and tests the

hypothesis that US government transition-inspired

democracy promotion will successfully establish liberal

democracy around the world. It features two detailed

case studies exploring political liberalisation in Bosnia

and Afghanistan.

Selected Contents: 1. Setting the Scene 2. Motives for

American Democracy Promotion 3. Examining USAID in

Bosnia and Afghanistan 4. No Liberal Democracy, just an

American Supported Formal Democracy 5. Can Formal

Democracy meet the Objectives of the American Mission?

6. Application of Research Findings to Other Cases: Iraq

7. American Democracy Promotion and the Dawn of the

Obama Era

September 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58892-8: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Pathways from Ethnic Conflict

Institutional Redesign in Divided Societies

Edited by John Coakley, University College Dublin,


Series: Routledge Studies in Nationalism and Ethnicity

This book breaks new ground by tracing conflict

resolving strategies in a number of countries which are

at varying stages along the path towards settling

long-standing ethnic tensions.

This book is published as a special issue of Nationalism

and Ethnic Politics.

Selected Contents: 1. Preface William Safran 2. Comparing

Ethnic Conflicts: Common Patterns, Shared Challenges

John Coakley 3. Belgium: Towards the Breakdown of a

Nation-State in the Heart of Europe? Lieven De Winter and

Pierre Baudewyns 4. Spain: Identity Boundaries and Political

Reconstruction Francisco Jose Llera 5. Northern Ireland: From

Multiphased Conflict To Multilevelled Settlement Jennifer Todd

6. Bosnia: Dayton is Dead! Long Live Dayton! Roberto Belloni

7. Cyprus: Domestic Ethnopolitical Conflict and International

Politics Joseph S. Joseph 8. Lebanon: From Consociationalism

to Conciliation Simon Haddad 9. South Africa: The Long

View on Political Transition Adrian Guelke 10. Sri Lanka:

The Challenge of Postwar Peace Building, State Building,

and Nation Building S.W.R. de A. Samarasinghe 11. Ethnic

Conflict Resolution: Routes Towards Settlement John Coakley

July 2010: 246 x 174: 248pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55402-2: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Routledge Studies in Peace and

Conflict Resolution

Series edited by Tom Woodhouse and

Oliver Ramsbotham, both at University

of Bradford, UK

The Routledge Studies in Peace and

Conflict Resolution series provides an

outlet for some of the most significant

new work emerging in the peace and

conflict studies field.


Economic Assistance and

Conflict Transformation

Peacebuilding in Northern Ireland

Sean Byrne, University of Manitoba, Canada

This book examines the role of economic aid in the

management and resolution of protracted ethnic

conflicts, focusing on the case study of Northern Ireland.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Economic Assistance:

Building the Peace in Northern Ireland 2. Economic Inequality,

Civil Rights, and Working-Class Politics in Northern Ireland

3. International Economic Assistance and the Economy of

Northern Ireland 4. The Role of the International Fund for

Ireland and the European Union Peace II Fund in Promoting

Peace and Reducing Violence in Northern Ireland 5. Images

of Bureaucratic Challenges 6. Images of Peacebuilding and

Reconciliation 7. Images of Economic Development and

Community Capacity Building 8. Conclusions: Economic

Assistance and the Northern Ireland Conflict

October 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59481-3: £80.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83822-8

For more information, visit:



Governing Ethnic Conflict

Consociation, Identity and the Price of Peace

Andrew Finlay, Trinity College Dublin, Ireland

This book offers an intellectual history of an emerging

technology of peace and explains how the liberal state

has come to endorse illiberal subjects and practices.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Anthropology,

Cultural Pluralism and Consociational Theory 3. Essentialism

and the Reconciliation of the Liberal State to Ethnicity 4. Is

Ethnopolitics a Form of Biopolitics? 5. Consociationalism as

a Form of Liberal Governmentality: ‘Single Identity Work’

versus Community Relations 6. Paradigm Shifts and the

Production of ‘National Being’ 7. No Exit: Human Rights and

the Priority of Ethnicity 8. ‘A Long Way To Get Very Little’:

The Durability of Identity, Socialist Politics and Communal

Discipline 9. Conclusion

July 2010: 216 x 138: 168pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49803-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84731-2

For more information, visit:



Political Discourse and

Conflict Resolution

Debating Peace in Northern Ireland

Edited by Katy Hayward, Queen’s University, Belfast

and Catherine O’Donnell

This book offers new insights into the close relationship

between political discourses and conflict resolution

through critical analysis of the role of discursive change

in a peace process.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Political Discourse

and Conflict Resolution Katy Hayward 2. Constructing

Legitimacy in Political Discourse in the Early Phase of the

Troubles Sissel Rosland 3. Finding Consensus: Political Discourse

in the Republic of Ireland on the Troubles and Peace Process

Catherine O’Donnell 4. Interpreting New Labour’s Political

Discourse on the Peace Process Aaron Edwards 5. Discourse

Worlds in Northern Ireland: The Legitimisation of the 1998

Agreement Laura Filardo-Llamas 6. ‘Humespeak’: The SDLP,

Political Discourse and the Peace Process P. J. McLoughlin

7. DUP Discourses on Violence and their Impact on the Peace

Process Amber Rankin and Gladys Ganiel 8. The Old Order

Changeth – or Not? Modern Discourses within the Orange

Order James W. McAuley and Jonathan Tonge 9. Continuity

and Change in the Discourse of Republican Former Prisoners

Peter Shirlow, Jonathan Tonge and James W. McAuley

10. Imagining ‘A Shared Future’: Post-Conflict Discourses on

Peace-Building Milena Komarova 11. Sectarian Demography:

Dubious Discourses of Ethno-National Conflict Owen

McEldowney, James Anderson and Ian Shuttleworth 12. ‘From

Belfast to Baghdad…’?: Discourses of Northern Ireland’s ‘Model’

of Conflict Resolution Eamonn O’Kane 13. ‘The IRA Are Not

Al-Qaeda’: ‘New Terrorism’ Discourse and Irish Republicanism

Mark McGovern 14. Debating Peace and Conflict in Northern

Ireland: Towards a Narrative Approach Adrian Little

September 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56628-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84249-2

For more information, visit:


Transforming Violent


Radical Disagreement, Dialogue and Survival

Oliver Ramsbotham, University of Bradford, UK

This book investigates

intractable conflicts and their

main verbal manifestation –

radical disagreement – and

explores what can be done

when conflict resolution fails.

Selected Contents: Prologue:

Having the First Word Part 1:

Radical Disagreement and

Conflict Intractability 1. Radical

Disagreement and Discourse

Analysis 2. Radical Disagreement

and Conflict Analysis 3. Radical

Disagreement and Conflict Resolution Part 2: Taking Radical

Disagreement Seriously 4. Methodology: Studying Agonistic

Dialogue 5. Phenomenology: Exploring Agonistic Dialogue

6. Epistemology: Understanding Agonistic Dialogue 7. Praxis:

Managing Agonistic Dialogue 8. Re-entry: Feeding back into

Conflict Settlement and Conflict Transformation

Part 3: Radical Disagreement and the Future 9. Radical

Disagreement and Human Difference 10. Radical Disagreement

and Human Survival. Epilogue: Having the Last Word

January 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55207-3: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-55208-0: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-85967-4

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

CoNFliCT resoluTioN 33

Forthcoming in 2011

EU Conflict Prevention

and Crisis Management

Roles, Institutions, and Policies

Edited by Eva Gross, Vrije Universiteit Brussels,

Belgium and Ana E. Juncos, University of Bath, UK

Series: Routledge/UACES Contemporary European


This book offers a comprehensive analysis of long and

short-term EU conflict prevention and crisis management

policies undertaken in various theatres and policy

domains, featuring case studies on West Africa,

Afghanistan and Morocco.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Eva Gross and Ana E.

Juncos Part 1: Institutions 2. The Institutionalisation of the

EU’s Conflict Prevention and Crisis Management Governance

Regime Petar Petrov 3. Conceptualising the EU as a

Civil-Military Crisis Manager: Institutional Actors and their

Principals Nadia Klein 4. The Other Side of EU Crisis

Management: A Sociological Institutionalist Analysis Ana E.

Juncos Part 2: Policies 5. The European Union in West Africa:

From Developmental to Diplomatic Role? Marie Gibert 6. The

EU in Afghanistan: What Role for EU Crisis Management? Eva

Gross 7. The EU’s Role in Georgia: Towards a Coherent Crisis

Management Strategy? Giselle Bosse Part 3: Roles

8. European Union Conflict Prevention and Crisis Management

and the European Security Architecture Emma J. Stewart

9. Transformative ESDP: The EU’s Refashioning on the World

Stage Xymena Kurowska 10. Conclusion Eva Gross and

Ana E. Juncos. Appendix

January 2011: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57235-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Conflict Resolution

Theory and Practice

Edited by Stefan Wolff, University of Birmingham,

UK and Christalla Yakinthou, University of Western


Conflict Resolution: Theory & Practice is an ambitious and

original textbook, taking a multi-perspective approach to

the study of conflict resolution in divided societies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Stefan Wolff and

Christalla Yakinthou Section 1: Theoretical Perspectives

2. Power-Sharing/Liberal Consociationalism Brendan O’Leary

3. Centripetalism Benjamin Reilly 4. Power Dividing Philip

Roeder 5. Territorial Solutions Stefan Wolff 6. A Practitioner’s

View Alvaro de Soto Section 2: Actors and Processes

7. The Evolution of Diplomacy in Peace-Making William

Zartman 8. Crafting Solutions for Divided Societies: The UN

John McGarry 9. Crafting Solutions for Divided Societies: The

EU Kalman Mizsei 10. Crafting Solutions for Divided Societies:

The AU 11. The Role of Activists: The Mano River Women’s

Peace Network 12. The Role of NGOs Oleh Protsyk 13. The

Role of Quiet Diplomacy John Packer Section 3: Case

Studies 14. Northern Ireland Rick Wilford 15. Lebanon

Michael Kerr 16. Cyprus Christalla Yakinthou 17. Kosovo

Marc Weller 18. Indonesia Donald Horowitz 19. Afghanistan

Wolfgang Danspeckgruber 20. Iraq Gareth Stansfield

21. Sudan 22. Rwanda 23. Conclusion Stefan Wolff and

Christalla Yakinthou

June 2011: 246 x 174: 336pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56373-4: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-56374-1: £25.99

For more information, visit:



CoNFliCT resoluTioN

Statebuilding and Justice


Post-Conflict Reconstruction in Afghanistan

Matteo Tondini

Series: Cass Series on Peacekeeping

The book provides an updated

account of justice reform in

Afghanistan, which started in

the wake of the US-led military

intervention of 2001.

Selected Contents:

1. Introduction: Justice System

Reform in Afghanistan

2. Reforming Public Institutions

in Countries Recovering from

Conflict: A Brief Overview

3. Justice Sector Reform in

Countries Recovering from

Conflict 4. The System of Justice in Afghanistan before the

US Military Intervention of 2001 5. Phase One – From Tokyo

to London: The ‘Lead Nation Approach’ 6. Phase Two –

From London to Paris and Beyond: Implementing the Local

Ownership Principle in Justice Sector Reform 7. Conclusion

February 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55894-5: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86578-1

For more information, visit:



International Statebuilding

The Rise of Post-Liberal Governance

David Chandler, University of Westminster, UK

Series: Critical Issues in Global Politics

This concise and accessible new

text offers original and insightful

analysis of the policy paradigm

informing international

statebuilding interventions.

The book covers the theoretical

frameworks and practices of

international statebuilding, the

debates they have triggered,

and the way that international

statebuilding has developed

in the post-Cold War era.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Statebuilding

Paradigm 2. The ‘Liberal Peace’ Critique of International

Intervention 3. Rethinking the State 4. Post-Liberal

Governance 5. The EU’s Export of ‘The Rule of Law’ and

‘Good Governance’ 6. Security and Statebuilding: From

Intervention to Prevention 7. Development as Freedom: From

Colonialism to Climate Change 8. Race, Culture and Civil

Society: Statebuilding and the Privileging

of Difference 9. Conclusion

August 2010: 216 x 138: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-42117-1: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-42118-8: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-84732-9

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Political Economy of


Power after Peace

Edited by Mats Berdal, King’s College London, UK

and Dominik Zaum, University of Reading, UK

Series: Routledge Studies in Intervention and


This volume examines and evaluates the impact of

international statebuilding interventions on the political

economy of post-conflict countries over the past 20 years.

Selected Contents: Introduction Mats Berdal and Dominik

Zaum Part 1: Case studies 1. Iraq Toby Dodge 2. Kosovo

Dominik Zaum and Verena Knaus 3. East Timor Anthony

Goldstone 4. Afghanistan Anatol Lieven 5. Burundi Peter

Uvin and Leanne Bayer 6. Haiti Robert Muggah 7. Sierra

Leone Funmi Olonisakin 8. Sudan Peter Woodward and

Atta al-Batahani 9. Georgia Neil MacFarlane 10. Macedonia,

Kristof Bender Part 2: Cross-Cutting Themes: Institution-

Building and Political Representationn 11. Constitutional

Design Oisin Tansey 12. Electoral Processes Benjamin Reilly

Economic Reform 13. Privatization and Property Rights

Christopher Cramer 14. Public Finances 15. Corruption and

Organised Crime Michael Pugh 16. Statebuilding, Inequality,

and Stability Frances Stewart 17. Regulating Trade in Conflict

Commodities Ricardo Soares Oliviera Statebuilding

Approaches of Selected International Actors 18. The

International Financial Institutions Susan L. Woodward

19. The United Nations Mats Berdal 20. Regional Approaches

to Statebuilding I: The European Union Richard Caplan and

Spyros Economides 21. Regional Approaches to Statebuilding

II: The African Union and ECOWAS Kwesi Aning. Bibliography

March 2011: 246 x 174: 368pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60478-9: £80.00

For more information, visit:



The Political Economy

of Peacemaking

Achim Wennmann, Graduate Institute of

International and Development Studies, Switzerland

Series: Conflict, Development and Peacebuilding

This book focuses on the economic dimensions of peace

processes and examines the opportunities and constraints

for assisting negotiated exits out of conflict.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Charting the Political

Economy of Peacemaking 1. The Political Economy of

Conflict and the Engagement Process 2. Economic Issues in

Peace Negotiations 3. Economic Instruments and Mediation

4. Natural Resources, Income Sharing, and War-to-Peace

Transitions 5. Development Agencies and Business as

Partners in Peacemaking 6. The Spoiler Challenge and

Forward-Looking Peacemaking. Conclusion

November 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58626-9: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83517-3

For more information, visit:


PeaCe aNd

CoNFliCT sTudies

PeaCe aNd



Handbook of Peace and

Conflict Studies

Edited by Charles Webel and Johan Galtung

This Handbook provides a

cutting-edge and transdisciplinary

overview of the main issues,

debates, state-of-the-art

methods, and key concepts in

peace and conflict studies today.

Selected Contents: Introduction

1. Toward a Philosophy and

Metapsychology of Peace 2. Peace

by Peaceful Conflict Transformation:

The Transcend Approach

Part 1: Understanding and

Transforming Conflict 3. Negotiation 4. Mediation

5. Former Yugoslavia and Iraq: A Comparative Analysis of

International Conflict Mismanagement 6. Peace Studies and

Peace Politics: Multicultural Common Security in North-South

Conflict Situations 7. Disarmament 8. Nuclear Disarmament

Part 2: Creating Peace 9. Peace and Conflict Counseling and

Training: The Transcend Approach 10. Nonviolence: More Than

the Absence of Violence 11. Human Rights / Peace Processes

12. Reconciliation 13. Peace as a Self-Regulating Process

Part 3: Supporting Peace 14. Gender and Peace: Towards

a Gender-Inclusive Holistic Perspective 15. Peace Business

16. Peace Journalism 17. Peace Psychology: Theory and Practice

18. Rethinking Peace Education Part 4: Peace Across the

Disciplines 19. Peace Studies as a Transdisciplinary Project

20. The Spirit of War and the Spirit of Peace: Understanding

the Role of Religion 21. International Law: Amid Power, Order

and Justice 22. The Language Game of Peace 23. Peace and

the Arts 24. Peace through Health? Conclusion

2007: 246 x 174: 424pp

Hb: 978-0-415-39665-3: £130.00

Pb: 978-0-415-48319-3: £27.99

eBook: 978-0-203-08916-3

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Liberal Peacebuilding and

Global Governance

Beyond the Metropolis

David Roberts, University of Ulster, UK

Series: Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict


This book examines the limits to cosmopolitan liberal

peacebuilding caused by its preoccupation with the

values and assumptions of neoliberal global governance.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Praxis of

Peacebuilding 3. Positive Peace and Social Justice

4. Structural Reforms: The Institutionalized Path and

the Evolutionary Path 5. Institutionalizing Positive Peace

6. Peacebuilding, Governmentality and Human Security

7. Conclusion. Bibliography

April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49743-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


The Routledge Handbook of

War and Society

Iraq and Afghanistan

Edited by Steven Carlton-Ford, University of

Cincinnatti, USA and Morten G. Ender, United

States Military Academy, West Point, USA

This new Handbook provides

an introduction to current

sociological and behavioral

research on the effects of the

wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.

Selected Contents: Foreword

Christopher Dandeker.

Introduction Steven Carlton-Ford

and Morton G. Ender Part 1: War

on the Ground: Combat and

Its Aftermath 1. Fighting Two

Protracted Wars: Recruiting and

Retention with an All-Volunteer Force Susan M. Ross

2. Fighting the Irregular War in Afghanistan: Success in

Combat - Struggles in Stabilization Brigid Myers Pavilonis

3. Learning the Lessons of Counterinsurgency Ian Roxborough

4. Twenty-First Century Narratives from Afghanistan:

Storytelling, Morality, and War Ryan D. Pengelly and Anne

Irwin 5. Two US Combat Units in Iraq: Psychological Contracts

When Expectations and Realities Diverge Wilbur Scott, David

McCone, and George R. Mastroianni 6. Capturing Saddam

Hussein: Social Network Analysis and Counterinsurgency

Operations Brian J. Reed and David R. Segal 7. Apples, Barrels

and Abu Ghraib George R. Mastroianni and George Reed

8. The War on Terror in the Early 21 Century: Applying Lessons

from Sociological Classics and Sites of Abuse Ryan Ashley

Caldwell and Stjepan G. Mestrovic Part 2: War on the

Ground: Non-Combat Operations, Noncombatants,

and Operators 9. Policing Post-War Iraq: Insurgency, Civilian

Police, and the Reconstruction of Society Mathieu Deflem and

Suzanne Sutphin 10. Policing Afghanistan: Civilian Police

Reform and the Resurgence of the Taliban Mathieu Deflem

11. Managing Humanitarian Information in Iraq Aldo Benini,

Charles Conley, Joseph Donahue, and Shawn Messick

12. Role of Contractors and Other Non-Military Personnel

in Today’s Wars O. Shawn Cupp and William C. Latham, Jr.

13. Evaluating Psychological Operations in Operation Enduring

Freedom James E. Griffith 14. Armed Conflict and Health:

Cholera in Iraq Daniel Poole 15. Iraqi Adolescents:

Self-Regard, Self-Derogation, and Perceived Threat in War

Steve Carlton-Ford, Morten G. Ender, and Ahoo Tabatabai

Part 3: The War Back Home: The Social Construction of

War, Its Heroes, and Its Enemies 16. Globalization and the

Invasion of Iraq: State Power and the Enforcement of

Neo-liberalism Daniel Egan 17. The Pakistan and Afghan

Crisis Riaz Ahmed Shaikh 18. Mass Media as Risk-

Management in the ’War on Terror’ Christopher M. Pieper

19. Talking War: How Elite Newspaper Editorials and Opinion

Pieces Debated the Attack on Iraq Alexander G. Nikolaev and

Douglas V. Porpora 20. Debating Antiwar Protests: The

Microlevel Discourse of Social Movement Framing on a

University LISTSERV Mark Hedley and Sara A. Clark

21. Making Heroes: An Attributional Perspective Gregory C.

Gibson, Richard Hogan, John Stahura, and Eugene Jackson

22. Making the Muslim Enemy: The Social Construction of the

Enemy in the War on Terror Erin Steuter and Deborah Wills

Part 4: The War Back Home: Families and Youth on the

Home Front 23. Greedy Media: Army Families, Embedded

Reporting, and War in Iraq Morten G. Ender, Kathleen M.

Campbell, Toya J. Davis and Patrick R. Michaelis 24. Military

Child Well-being in the Face of Mulitple Deployments Rachel

Lipari, Anna Winters, Kenneth Matos, Jason Smith and Lindsay

Rock 25. American Undergraduate Attiutdes Toward the Wars

in Iraq and Afghanistan: Trends and Variations Morten G.

Ender, David E. Rohall and Michael D. Matthews

August 2010: 246 x 174: 320pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56732-9: £125.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84433-5

For more information, visit:



Routledge Handbook of Ethnic


Edited by Karl Cordell, University of Plymouth, UK

and Stefan Wolff, University of Birmingham, UK

A definitive global survey of the

interaction of race, ethnicity,

nationalism and politics, this

Handbook blends theoretically

grounded, rigorous analysis

with empirical illustrations, to

provide a state-of-the art

overview of the contemporary

debates on one of the most

pervasive international security

challenges today.

The contributors to this volume

offer a 360-degree perspective on ethnic conflict: from

the theoretical foundations of nationalism and ethnicity,

to the causes and consequences of ethnic conflict, and

to the various strategies adopted in response to it.

Selected Contents: The Study of Ethnic Conflict: An

Introduction Karl Cordell and Stefan Wolff Part 1: Context

& Key Concepts 1. The Origin of Nations: Contested

Beginnings, Contested Futures Jennifer Jackson-Preece

2. Ideology and Nationalism Daniele Conversi 3. The

Nation-State: Civic and Ethnic Dimensions Colin Clark

4. Stateless Nations in a World of Nation States Ephraim Nimni

5. Ethnicity and Religion Joe Ruane and Jennifer Todd 6. Race

and Ethnicity Chris Gilligan Part 2: Ethnicity and Conflict

7. Ethnicity as a Generator of Conflict Stuart Kaufman

8. Democracy and Democratization Jenny Engstrom 9. The

Causes and Consequences of Ethnic Cleansing Erin Jenne

10. Genocide Jim Hughes 11. Debating Partition: Evaluating

the Standard Justifications Brendan O’Leary 12. Irredentas

and Secessions: Adjacent Phenomena, Neglected Connections

Donald Horowitz 13. Conflict Prevention: A Policy in Search of

a Theory or a Theory in Search of a Policy? David Carment and

Martin Fischer 14. Managing and Settling Ethnic Conflict Asaf

Siniver 15. Multilateral Frameworks for Conflict Resolution

Eva Sobotka 16. Post-Conflict Reconstruction in Ethnically

Divided Societies Monika Heupel Part 3: Accommodation

and Conciliation 17. Deepening Democracy: The Role of

Civil Society Ian O’Flynn and David Russell 18. Human Rights

and Ethnopolitics Josef Marko 19. Territorial Approaches to

Ethnic Conflict Settlement John McGarry and Brendan O’Leary

20. Ethnic Accomodation in Unitary States Frans Schrijver

21. National Cultural Autonomy David Smith 22. Centripetalism

Benjamin Reilly 23. Power Sharing Stefan Wolff and Karl

Cordell 24. Playing the Ethnic Card: Liberal Democratic and

Authoritarian Practices Compared Sandra Barkhof

September 2010: 246 x 174: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47625-6: £110.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84549-3

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

PeaCe aNd CoNFliCT sTudies 35

Forthcoming in 2011



From Concept to Commission

Robert Jenkins, Birkbeck, University of London, UK

Series: Global Institutions

This book is about the origins

and evolution of peacebuilding

as a concept, the creation and

functioning of the UN

Peacebuilding Commission as

an institution, and the

complicated relationship

between these two processes.

Selected Contents: 1. Overview

2. Birth of an Institution: The UN

Peacebuilding Commission

3. Peacebuilding: An Evolving

Concept 4. Peacebuilding in

Practice: Debating the Record 5. The Peacebuilding

Commission in Action 6. Assessing the Peacebuilding

Commission’s Performance 7. Theoretical Implications

8. Conclusion and the Road Ahead

June 2011: 216 x 138: 176pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77643-1: £70.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77644-8: £15.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Small Arms, Crime and Conflict

Global Governance and the Threat of

Armed Violence

Edited by Owen Greene, University of Bradford, UK

and Nic Marsh, PRIO, Oslo, Norway

Series: Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict


This book critically examines the nexus between

arms availability and armed violence.

Selected Contents: Introduction Owen Greene and Nic

Marsh 1. The Tools of Insurgency: A Review of the Role of

Small Arms and Light Weapons in Warfare Nicholas Marsh

2. Small Arms and Light Weapons Spread and Conflict Mike

Bourne 3. Lethal Instruments: Small Arms and Deaths in

Armed Conflict Joakim Kreutz and Nicholas Marsh

4. Regaining State Control: Arms and Violence in Post-Conflict

Countries Joakim Kreutz, Nicholas Marsh and Manuela Torre

5. Armed Violence within Societies Owen Greene 6. Causes

and Costs of Gun Violence: A Critical Evaluation Thomas

Jackson and Nicholas Marsh 7. SALW and Armed Violence

in Urban Areas Valentina Bartolucci and Anna Kannewarff

8. Guns, Goons and Gold as Burdens of a Fragile State

Governing Small Arms and Light Weapons Ariel Macaspac and

Owen Greene 9. Governing Small Arms and Light Weapons

Owen Greene 10. Restructuring the Production of Small Arms

and Light Weapons Dimitar Dimitrov and Peter Hall 11. What

do the Natives Know: Are there Societal Mechanisms for

Controlling SALW and other Idle Questions Michael Ashkenazi

12. Post-Conflict Disarmament and Governance Owen Greene

and Albert Boada 13. What do We Now Think We Know, and

Priorities For Future Research Owen Greene and Nicholas Marsh

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56700-8: £75.00

For more information, visit:



PeaCe aNd CoNFliCT sTudies

Cass Series on Peacekeeping

Series edited by Michael Pugh,

University of Bradford, UK

This series examines all aspects of

peacekeeping, from the political, operational

and legal dimensions to the developmental

and humanitarian issues that must be dealt

with by all those involved with peacekeeping

in the world today.


Peace Operations and

Organised Crime

Enemies or Allies?

Edited by James Cockayne and Adam Lupel, both

at International Peace Institute, New York, USA

This volume examines the relationship between

international peace operations and organised crime –

which in some cases are clear enemies, and in others,

tacit allies.

Selected Contents: Foreword Terje Rød-Larsen

1. Introduction: Rethinking the Relationship between Peace

Operations and Organized Crime James Cockayne and Adam

Lupel 2. Framing the Issue: UN Responses to Corruption and

Criminal Networks in Postconflict Settings Victoria K. Holt and

Alix J. Boucher 3. Symbiosis between Peace Operations and

Illicit Business in Bosnia Peter Andreas 4. Problems of Crime

Fighting by ‘Internationals’ in Kosovo Cornelius Friesendorf

5. Understanding Criminality in West African Conflicts William

Reno 6. Peace Operations and International Crime: The Case

of Somalia Roland Marchal 7. Organized Crime, Illicit Power

Structures, and Threatened Peace Processes: The Case of

Guatemala Patrick Gavigan 8. Winning Haiti’s Protection

Competition: Organized Crime and Peace Operations Past,

Present, and Future James Cockayne 9. Peacekeepers among

Poppies: Afghanistan, Illicit Economies, and Intervention Vanda

Felbab-Brown 10. Organized Crime and Corruption in Iraq

Phil Williams 11. Closing the Gap between Peace Operations

and Postconflict Insecurity: Towards a Violence Reduction

Agenda Robert Muggah and Keith Krause 12. Conclusion:

From Iron Fist to Invisible Hand – Peace Operations, Organized

Crime, and Intelligent International Law Enforcement James

Cockayne and Adam Lupel

December 2010: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60170-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

UN Peace Operations and

Post-Conflict Reconstruction

Learning Lessons From Haiti

Eirin Mobekk, University of Bradford, UK

This book looks at UN Peace Operations in Haiti and

why they went so dramatically wrong first time around,

resulting in much deep-seated conflict.

Selected Contents: 1. UN Peace Operations: An Overview

2. Haiti and the Need for Multilateral Interventions

3. Disarmament, Demobilisation and Reintegration (DDR)

4. Security Sector Reform 5. Justice and Reconciliation

6. External Democracy Promotion 7. Sustainable Economic

Development 8. Conclusion

June 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48086-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Peacekeeping in

the 21st Century

Cosmopolitanism and the Globalization

of Security

Tom Woodhouse and Oliver Ramsbotham, both

at University of Bradford, UK

This book provides a comprehensive survey of the

current levels of peace-keeping forces at global, regional,

sub-regional and nation-state levels. The authors offer a

census of peace-keeping capacity in the first decade of

the twenty-first century and chart plans to develop this

capacity. This provides an assessment of global capability

for implementing the human security agenda that has

recently emerged and been endorsed by the UN Security

Council and member states.

The book also has a normative dimension that identifies

discourses about peace-keeping, peacebuilding and

conflict prevention in the context of the national, regional

and global locations in which they occur. This provides a

qualitative and quantitative assessment of the likelihood

of a new peace-keeping model emerging, based on

cosmopolitan peace-keeping theory and practice.

Selected Contents: 1. The Twenty First Century Conflict

Environment 2. Peacekeeping Surveyed: Current Missions,

Mandates and Challenges 3. America and the Caribbean

4. Asia and Asia-Pacific 5. Africa 6. Europe 7. Russia and

Central and Eastern Europe 8. Middle East 9. Cosmopolitan

Peacekeeping and 21st-Century Conflict

June 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-44051-6: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-44052-3: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Rethinking the Liberal Peace

External Models and Local Alternatives

Edited by Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh, Sciences Po,

Paris, France

This book presents a critical analysis of the liberal peace

project and offers possible alternatives and models.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Assumptions and

Illusions Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh Part 1: Theory and

Critiques of Liberal Peace 2. Becoming Liberal, Unbecoming

Liberalism: Liberal-Local Hybridity via the Everyday as a Response

to the Paradoxes of Liberal Peacebuilding Oliver P. Richmond

3. Peace, Self-Governance and International Engagement:

A Postcolonial Ethic of Liberal Peacebuilding Kristoffer Lidén

4. The Liberal Peace: State-building, Democracy and Local

Ownership David Chandler Part 2: Liberal Democracy

5. Democracy and Security: A Shotgun Marriage? Robin

Luckham 6. What’s Law Got To Do With It? The Role of Law

in Post-Conflict Democratization and Its (Flawed) Assumptions

Michael Schoiwhohl 7. No Such Thing as Cosmopolitanism:

Field-Dependent Consequences in International Administrative

Governance and Criminal Justice Nicholas Dorn Part 3:

Market Liberalism 8. Curing Strangeness in the Political

Economy of Peacebuilding: Traces of Liberalism and Resistance

Michael Pugh 9. Economic Dimensions of the Liberal Peace

and its Implications for Conflict in Developing Countries Syed

Mansoob Murshed Part 4: Case Studies 10. Reconstructing

Post-2006 Lebanon: A Distorted Market Christine Sylva

Hamieh and Roger Mac Guinty 11. Is Liberal Democracy

Possible in Iraq? Amal Shlash and Patrick Tom 12. Conflicted

Outcomes and Values: (Neo)Liberal Peace in Central Asia and

Afghanistan Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh 13. Conclusion: Whither

Liberal Peace? Shahrbanou Tadjbakhsh. Bibliography

February 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60055-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Conflict and Peacebuilding

in Sri Lanka

Caught in the Peace Trap?

Edited by Jonathan Goodhand, School of Oriental

and African Studies, University of London, UK,

Jonathan Spencer, University of Edinburgh, UK

and Benedikt Korf, University of Zurich - Irchel,


Series: Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

The period between 2001 and 2006 saw the rise and

fall of an internationally supported effort to bring a

protracted violent conflict in Sri Lanka to a peaceful

resolution. A ceasefire agreement, signed in February

2002, was followed by six rounds of peace talks, but

growing political violence, disagreements over core

issues and a fragmentation of the constituencies of the

key parties led to an eventual breakdown. This book

brings together a unique range of perspectives on this

problematic and ultimately unsuccessful peace process.

Selected Contents: 1. Caught in the Peace Trap? On the

Illiberal Consequences of Liberal Peace in Sri Lanka Jonathan

Goodhand and Benedikt Korf 2. Government-LTTE Peace

Negotiations in 2002-2005 and the Clash of State Formation

Projects Jayadeva Uyangoda 3. The Indian Factor in the

Peace Process and Conflict Resolution in Sri Lanka S.I.

Keethaponcalan 4. Superpowers and Small Conflicts: The

United States and Sri Lanka Jeffrey Lunsted 5. The Military

Dynamics of the Peace Process and Its Aftermath Chris Smith

6. Would the Real Dutugemunu Please Stand Up? The Politics

of Sinhala Nationalist Authenticity and Populist Discontent

David Rampton with Asanga Welikala 7. Whose War? Whose

Peace? The LTTE and the Politics of the North East Liz Philipson

8. The Genealogy of Muslim Political Voices in Sri Lanka Nick

Lewer and Mohammed Ismail 9. Politics of Market Reforms

and the UNF-led Negotiations Sunil Bastian 10. Aiding Peace?

An Insider’s View of Donor Support for the Sri Lankan Peace

Process, 2000-2005 Adam Burke and Anthea Mulakala

11. Muddling the Peace Process: The Political Dynamics of the

Tsunami, Aid and Conflict Georg Frerks and Bart Klem 12. In

the Balance? Civil Society and the Peace Process 2002-2008

Oliver Walton with Paikiasothy Sarrabanmuttu 13. Reflections

on an Illiberal Peace: Stories from the East Jonathan Spencer

November 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46604-2: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

relaTed jourNal

Conflict, Security

& Development

Editor: Dylan Hendrickson, King’s

College London, UK

Conflict, Security

and Development

provides an analytical

and empirically

informed treatment

of the linkages

between issues

of security and

development in



relations. It places

emphasis on the

need to examine issues of security and

development in their mutual interaction

rather than as separate areas of academic

enquiry and policy-making.

For more information on the journal, including

subscription information, please visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Security, Development and

Nation-Building in Timor-Leste

A Cross-Sectoral Assessment

Edited by Vandra Harris, Flinders University,

Australia and Andrew John Goldsmith, University

of Wollongong, Australia

Series: Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

This volume draws together the perspectives of

practitioners, policy-makers and academics on the

international efforts to rebuild the world’s newest nation.

The contributors consider issues of peace-building,

security and justice sector reform as well as human

security in Timor-Leste, locating these in the broader

context of building nation, stability and development.

Selected Contents: Setting the Scene 1. The Struggle

for Independence was Just the Beginning Vandra Harris

and Andrew Goldsmith 2. The Nation-Building Agenda

in Timor-Leste M. Anne Brown Society and Culture

3. Women in the Post-Conflict Moment in Timorese Society

Sara Niner 4. Anatomy of a Conflict: The 2006-7 Communal

Violence in East Timor James Scambary 5. The Politics of

Culture and the Culture of Politics: A Case Study of Gender

and Politics in Los Palos, Timor-Leste Yvonne Corcoran-

Nantes Justice, Law and Security 6. The Legal Profession

in Timor-Leste’s Justice Sector Reconstruction: Opportunities

and Restraints Andrew Marriott 7. Judicial Systems Monitoring

Program Timor-Leste 8. Promoting the Rule of Law in

Timor-Leste Laura Grenfell 9. Police Development Program:

Lessons in Capacity Building Approaches Grant Edwards and

Tess O’Donnell 10. Out of Step? Multilateral Police Missions,

Culture and Nation-Building in Timor-Leste Andrew

Goldsmith and Vandra Harris Economy and Demography

11. Timor-Leste and the Resource Curse? An Assessment

Andrew Rosser 12. Demography of Timor-Leste: A Brief

Overview and Some Implications for Development and

Security Gouranga Dasvarma 13. Timor-Leste’s Future

Population Growth and its Economic Implications

Udoy Saikia and Merve Hosgelen

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60124-5: £85.00

For more information, visit:


Gender and Transitional Justice

The Women of East Timor

Susan Harris Rimmer, Australian National University

Series: Routledge Contemporary Southeast Asia Series

This book provides the first comprehensive feminist

analysis of the role of international law in the formal

transitional justice mechanisms. Using East Timor as a

case study, it offers reflections on transitional justice

administered by a UN transitional administration. Often

presented as a UN success story, the author

demonstrates that, in spite of women and children’s

rights programmes of the UN and other donors, justice

for women has deteriorated in post-conflict Timor, and

violence has remained a constant in their lives.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: A luta continua!

(The Fight Continues!) 2. Sexing the Subject of Transitional

Justice 3. Cecelia Soares Recalls: East Timor as a Case Study

4. Beloved Madam: The Indonesian ad hoc Human Rights

Court 5. Wearing his Jacket: The Serious Crimes Process

6. Women Cut in Half: The Commission for Reception, Truth

Seeking and Reconciliation and the Limits of Restorative Justice

7. Conclusion: ‘Operation Love’. Appendices. Bibliography

February 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56118-1: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Political Violence in

Post-Conflict Societies

Remarginalisation, Remobilisers

and Relationships

R. Anders Nilsson, Uppsala University, Sweden

Series: Routledge Studies in Intervention and


This book compares post-civil wars societies to look at

the presence or absence of organized violence, analysing

why some ex-combatants return to organised violence

and others do not.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Once a Solider, always a

Soldier? 2. Remarginalisation, Remobilisers and Relationships

3. Republic of Congo 4. Sierra Leone 5. Comparative

Analysis 6. Conclusions. Bibliography

March 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57922-3: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011


Theories of Violent Conflict

An Introduction

Jolle Demmers, Utrecht University, the Netherlands

This textbook introduces students of violent conflict to

a variety of prominent theoretical approaches, and to

examine the ontological stances and epistemological

traditions underlying these approaches.

In reviewing theories of conflict, this book takes the

centrality of the group as actor in contemporary conflict

as a point of departure. It demonstrates that a

meaningful analysis of contemporary conflict should

involve the study of (identity) group formation,

dynamics of interaction and collective action.

The book looks at:

• What makes a group?

• Why and how does a group resort to violence?

• Why and how do or don’t they stop?

This book aims to examine and compare the ways by

which these questions are addressed from a number of

prominent research perspectives: constructivism, social

identity theory, structuralism, political economy, human

needs theory, relative deprivation theory, collective action

theory, and rational choice theory. The final chapter of

the book aims to synthesize structure and agency-based

theories by proposing a structurationist approach to

violent conflict.

March 2011: 246 x 174: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55533-3: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-55534-0: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-86951-2

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

PeaCe aNd CoNFliCT sTudies 37


Peace and Conflict Studies

A Reader

Edited by Charles Webel, University of New York

in Prague, Czech Republic and Jorgen Johansen

This Reader is a comprehensive and intensive introduction

to the key works in the growing field of peace and

conflict studies.

The volume editors frame the discussion in an extensive

introduction and provide short introductions to each

section as well as suggestions for further reading and

student questions. This book will be essential reading

for students of peace and conflict studies and conflict

resolution, and highly recommended for students of

peace operations, peacebuilding, sociology, international

security and IR in general

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Meanings and History of

Peace; The Advent of Peace and Conflict Studies Part 2: The

Meanings and Nature of Conflict Part 3: The History of Peace

and Conflict Part 4: Conflict Management, Resolution, and

Transformation Part 5: Nonviolent Action and Social Change

Part 6: Building Cultures and Paradigms of Peace

May 2011: 246 x 174: 432pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59128-7: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-59129-4: £27.99

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Understanding Peace


Methods and Challenges

Magnus Öberg and Kristine Hoglund, both at

Uppsala University, Sweden

This textbook provides a comprehensive overview of

different methods and sources of information-gathering

for peace and conflict students and researchers, as well

as the challenges presented by such work.

Selected Contents: Preface Part 1: Introduction 1. Doing

Peace and Conflict Research Kristine Höglund and Magnus

Öberg 2. The Origins and Developments of Empirical Peace

Research Peter Wallensteen Part 2: Finding and Evaluating

Information 3. Guidelines for Source Evaluation Magnus

Öberg and Margareta Sollenberg 4. Gathering Conflict

Information Using Mass-Media Resources Magnus Öberg and

Margareta Sollenberg 5. Local versus International Reporting

on Violence: The Case of Burundi Frida Möller Part 3: The

Process of Information-Gathering 6. Systematic Data

Collection: Experiences from the Uppsala Conflict Data Program

Lotta Harbom and Ralph Sundberg 7. In-Depth Interviews:

Security, Access, and Emotion Karen Bronéus 8. Challenges

for Comparative Field Research Kristine Höglund 9. Focus

Groups: Safety in Numbers? Johanna Söderström 10. Survey

Research: Measuring Attitudes in Post-War Societies Kristine

Eck 11. Conclusions: Improving the Methods and Practices

for Information Gathering Kristine Höglund and Magnus

Öberg. Select Bibliography

March 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57197-5: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-57198-2: £23.99

For more information, visit:



PeaCe aNd CoNFliCT sTudies

Forthcoming in 2011

Peace and Conflict Research

Theory and Practice

Peter Wallensteen, Uppsala University, Sweden

Series: Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict


This volume comprises essays on peace research by Prof.

Peter Wallensteen, one of the leading scholars in the

field over the past 30 years.

Introduction Part 1: From Causes of War to Conflict

Prevention Introduction 1. Incompatibility, Confrontation

and War: Four Models and Three Historical Systems, 1816-1976

2. Universalism vs. Particularism: On the Limits of Major

Power Order 3. The Uppsala Conflict Data Program

1978-2002 4. Reassessing Recent Conflicts: Direct and

Structural Conflict Prevention Part 2: From Conflict

Analysis to Academic Diplomacy Introduction 5. Dag

Hammarskjöld and the Psychology of Conflict Diplomacy

6. Security Council Decisions in Perspective 7. The

Strengths and Limits of Academic Diplomacy: The Case

of Bougainville 8. Seminariet som akademisk diplomati,

[The Seminar as Academic Diplomacy Part 3: From

Liberation to Peacebuilding: The Evolution of Sanctions

Introduction 9. Characteristics of Economic Sanctions

10. A Century of Economic Sanctions: A Field Revisited

11. Positive Sanctions: On the Potential of Rewards and

Target Differentiation 12. Sanctionxs for Conflict Prevention

and Peacebuilding. Lessons Learned from Côte d’Ivoire and

Liberia Part 4: From Machiavelli to Peace Research

Introduction 13. The Origins of Peace Research 14. The

Uppsala Code of Ethics for Scientists 15. Peace Research

and Conflict Resolution

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58088-5: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-58089-2: £23.99

For more information, visit:



War, Peace and Progress in the

21st Century

Development, Violence and Insecurities

Edited by Mark T. Berger, Naval Postgraduate

School, Monterey, USA; University of British

Columbia, Canada and Heloise Weber, University

of Queensland, Australia

Series: ThirdWorlds

This book brings together

contributions that revisit the

dynamics and complexities of

the history of war and peace in

relation to the pursuit of


This book is published as a

special issue of Third World


Selected Contents: 1. War,

Peace and Progress: Conflict,

Development, (in)Security and

Violence in the 21st century Mark T. Berger and Heloise

Weber Part 1: The ‘Crisis’ of the Nation-State 2. The

Failure of State Building and the Promise of State Failure:

Reinterpreting the Security–Development Nexus in Haiti

Kamil Shah 3. State Building or Crisis Management? A

Critical Analysis of the Social and Political Implications of

the Regional Assistance Mission to Solomon Islands Shahar

Hameiri 4. What Sustains ‘Internal Wars’? The Dynamics of

Violent Conflict and State Weakness in Sudan Benjamin R.

Maitre 5. Realities of War: Global Development, Growing

Destructiveness and the Coming of a New Dark Age? John

Arquilla 6. The Logic of Warlord Politics Gordon H.

McCormick and Lindsay Fritz 7. ‘Sons of the Soil’ and

Contemporary State Making: Autochthony, Uncertainty and

Political Violence in Africa Kevin C. Dunn 8. Violence and

Victory: Guerrilla Warfare, ‘Authentic Self-Affirmation’ and

the Overthrow of the Colonial State Sebastian Kaempf

Part 2: The ‘Crisis’ of Global Development 9. Displacing

Insecurity in a Divided World: Global Security, International

Development and the Endless Accumulation of Capital

Marcus Taylor 10. The Pedagogy of Global Development:

The Promotion of Electoral Democracy and the Latin

Americanisation of Europe Teivo Teivainen 11. Global

Development and Human (In)Security: Understanding the

Rise of the Rajah Solaiman Movement and Balik Islam in the

Philippines Douglas A. Borer, Sean F. Everton and Moises M.

Nayve, Jr. 12. The Rise of a Global God-Image? Spiritual

Internationalists, the International Left and the Idea of Human

Progress Sebastian Job 13. Securing the State and Developing

Social Insecurities: The Securitisation of Citizenship in

Contemporary Colombia Cristina Rojas 14. Contemporary

Contradictions of the Global Development Project: Geopolitics,

Global Ecology and the ‘Development Climate’ Philip

McMichael 15. Human (In)Security and Development in

the 21st Century Heloise Weber and Mark T. Berger

October 2010: 246 x 174: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58859-1: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Armed Groups and

Contemporary Conflicts

Challenging the Weberian State

Edited by Keith Krause, Graduate Institute of

International & Development Studies, Switzerland

This book broadens our understanding of armed groups

and their origins, evolution, violent dynamics, and

relations with state power, through both conceptual

analysis and case studies.

Selected Contents: Preface 1. Introduction: The Challenge

of Non-State Armed Groups Keith Krause and Jennifer

Milliken 2. Non-State Armed Actors, New Imagined

Communities, and Shifting Patterns of Sovereignty and

Insecurity in the Modern World Diane E. Davis 3. With the

State against the State? The Formation of Armed Groups

Klaus Schlichte 4. Grasping the Financing and Mobilization

Cost of Armed Groups: A New Perspective on Conflict

Dynamics Achim Wennmann 5. From Social Movement to

Armed Group: A Case Study from Nigeria Jennifer M. Hazen

6. Gangs as Non-State Armed Groups: The Central American

Case Dennis Rodgers and Robert Muggah 7. The Role of

Non-State Actors in ‘Community-Based Policing’ – An

Exploration of the Arbakai (Tribal Police) in South-Eastern

Afghanistan Susanne Schmeidl and Masood Karokhail

8. Staging Society: Sources of Loyalty in the Angolan UNITA

Teresa Koloma Beck 9. Explaining Patterns of Violence in

Collapsed States William Reno 10. The Changing Ownership

of War: States, Insurgencies and Technology Aaron Karp

March 2010: 234 x 156: 216pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57457-0: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011


Thinking about War and Peace

Denise DeGarmo and E. Duff Wrobbel, both at

Southern Illinois University Edwardsville, USA

Rich in pedagogy and clearly

structured throughout, this

textbook combines theoretical

analysis with both historical and

contemporary examples to

explain, compare, and evaluate

the various causal theories and

moral frameworks that have

been most influential in

discussions of war. The book:

• clearly distinguishes the major

descriptive and normative

theories of war

• explains their historical/philosophical roots

• illustrates the theories using historical examples

• shows how theories relate to controversial

contemporary cases.

While there are several books related to the study of

war and peace, none approach the topic from such a

comprehensive viewpoint.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Pluralism

1. The Clash of Civilizations 2. Ethical Relativism 3. Religion

and War Part 2: Realism 4. Political Realism 5. Ethical

Realism 6. Economics and War Part 3: Idealism 7. Political

Liberalism/Idealism 8. Just War Theory 9. International

Law and War Part 4: Cosmopolitanism 10. Biology,

Psychology, and Economics 11. Virtues, Duties, and

Consequences 12. Globalization and War. Conclusion

June 2011: 246 x 174: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77372-0: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77445-1: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Atrocity and American Military

Justice in Southeast Asia

Trial by Army

Louise Barnett, Rutgers University, USA

Series: Routledge Studies in the Modern History of Asia

This book is an examination of American army legal

proceedings that resulted from a series of moments

when soldiers in a war zone crossed a line between

performing their legitimate functions and committing

crimes against civilians, or atrocities.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: War in the

Philippines 1. Mr. Root’s Atrocity Trials 2. The Real Atrocity

Trials Part 2: American Prosecution of Japanese War

Crimes in the Philippines 3. MacArthur and Yamashita

Part 3: From Lanang to Danang: The Philippine War

Writ Large in Vietnam 4. Anatomy of an Atrocity: Captain

Vincent Hartmann and the Trial that Wasn’t 5. My Lai:

Crossing the Line

January 2010: 234 x 156: 296pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55640-8: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86157-8

For more information, visit:


Mohajir Militancy in Pakistan

Violence and Transformation in the

Karachi Conflict

Nichola Khan, University of Brighton, UK

Series: Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Synthesizing political, anthropological and psychological

perspectives, this book addresses the everyday causes

and appeal of long-term involvement in extreme political

violence in urban Pakistan.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Post-Partition

History of the Mohajirs in Sindh 3. The Transformation

4. Partition Reprised: Grievance, Unification and Violence

5. Women in the Homeland 6. Jamaat E Islami and the Ijt

in Liaquatabad 7. Conclusion

March 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55490-9: £80.00

For more information, visit:



UN Sanctions and Conflict

Responding to Peace and Security Threats

Andrea Charron, Carleton University, Canada

Series: Routledge Studies in Security and Conflict


This book examines the UN Security Council’s experience

with sanctions since the Cold War, and, in particular, the

regimes adopted for particular types of conflict.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Security Council

Working Methods 3. Interstate Conflicts and UN Sanctions

4. Intrastate Conflicts and UN Sanctions 5. International

Norm-breaking States and UN Sanctions 6. Non-State

Sponsored Terrorism and UN Sanctions 7. Conclusions.

Appendices. Bibliography

December 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59835-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Nationalism and Ethnic Conflict

Edited by Mahendra Lawoti, Western Michigan

University, USA and Susan I. Hangen, Ramapo

College, USA

Series: Routledge Contemporary South Asia Series

Ethnic and nationalist movements surged forward in

Nepal after the restoration of democracy in 1990,

surprising observers who believed that ethnic harmony

prevailed in the country. This book analyses the rise in

ethnic mobilization, the dynamics and trajectories of

these movements, and their consequences for Nepal.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Issues, Theories and Context

1. Ethnic Groups and Mobilization: Theory and Reality in

Nepal Mahendra Lawoti and Susan I. Hangen 2. Politics,

Economy and Culture: Capitalism, Ethnicity, and the Rising

Wave of Himalayan Communism in Nepal Mallika Shakya

Part 2: Creating Identities and Forming Nations 3. The

National Muslim Forum Nepal and a Nepali Muslim ‘Nation’

Megan Adamson Sijapati 4. Many Names for Mother: The

Ethno-linguistic Politics of Deafness in Nepal Erika Hoffmann-

Dilloway 5. Problems of Identity for Dalits in Nepal’s

Nationalist Project Steven Folmar 6. This Land is Made out

of our Ancestors’ Sweat and Labor: Dhimals’ Indigenism

and Cultural Politics of ’Place Making’ in the Eastern Plains of

Nepal Janak Rai Part 3: Rising Mobilization and Conflict

7. The Changing Roles of Ethnic Parties Susan I. Hangen

8. Nepal’s Madhesi Movement Pramod Kantha 9. The Muslim

Madhesis: Coexistence of Religion and Ethnicity? Mollica

Dastider 10. Rising Ethnic Mobilization and Conflict in Nepal

Mahendra Lawoti Part 4: Future Prospects 11. Ethno-

Demographic and Linguistic Federalism for Nepal Bal Krishna

Mabuhang 12. Ethnic Mobilization and Future Political

Challenges Mahendra Lawoti and Susan Hangen

August 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78097-1: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Violence and Resistance

in Uzbekistan

Matteo Fumagalli, Central European University,


Series: Central Asian Studies

This book examines the origins of the current waves of

protest in Uzbekistan. The author analyses how these

have changed over the years and provides an outlook

into the country’s future. Arguing that the ‘Andijan

events’ were not an isolated episode of resistance

and/or repression in post-Soviet Uzbekistan, the author

shows that they are simply the latest episode in the

deterioration of state-society relations in Uzbekistan.

Selected Contents: 1. Authoritarianism, Security and (in)

Stability along the Silk Road 2. Uzbekistan’s Political System

3. Opposition Politics in Uzbekistan from Birlik and Erk to

Andijan 4. Continuity and Change in State-Group Relations

5. Whither Uzbekistan?

June 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48093-2: £85.00

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

PeaCe aNd CoNFliCT sTudies 39


Theory and Practice of

International Mediation

Selected Essays

Jacob Bercovitch, University of Canterbury,

New Zealand

Series: Routledge Studies in Security and Conflict


This volume brings together some of the most significant

papers on international conflict mediation by Jacob

Bercovitch, one of the leading scholars in the field.

Selected Contents: Part 1: The Nature and Theory of

Mediation 1. Social Research and the Study of Mediation:

Designing and Implementing Systematic Archival Research

2. Putting Mediation in Context 3. Mediation: A Review of

Performance and Analysis of Behavior 4. The Study of

International Mediation: Theoretical Issues and Empirical

Evidence 5. Mediation Success or Failure: The search for the

Elusive Criteria Part 2: Case Studies in Mediation 6. A Case

Study of Mediation as a Method of International Conflict

Resolution: The Camp David Experience 7. Conflict

Management and the Oslo Experience: Assessing the Success

of Israeli-Palestinian Peacemaking Part 3: Empirical Studies in

Mediation 8. Is there Madness in the Method of Mediation:

Research into the Conditions of Effective Mediation (with Scott

Gartner) 9. Negotiation or Mediation? An Exploration of the

Factors Affecting the Choice of Conflict Management in

International Conflict (with R. Jackson) 10. Who Mediates: The

Political Economy of International Conflict Management (with

G. Schneider) 11. Why Do They Do it Like This: An Analysis of

the Factors Influencing Mediator Behavior in International

Conflicts (with A. Houston) Part 4: Current Issues in

Mediation Research 12. Managing Ethnic Conflicts: The Role

and Relevance of Mediation 13. Managing Ethnic Civil Wars:

Assessing the Determinants of Successful Mediation (with K.

DeRouen) 14. Culture and International Mediation: An

Empirical Assessment (with O. Elgstrom) 15. The United

Nations and the Mediation of International Disputes

16. The Termination of Enduring International Conflicts:

Theoretical and Empirical Considerations’ (with P. Diehl and G.

Goertz) 17. Preventing Deadly Conflicts: The Contribution of

International Mediation

December 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46958-6: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Media, War aNd seCuriTy

Media, War aNd seCuriTy

Media, War and Security

Series edited by Andrew Hoskins,

University of Nottingham, UK and

Oliver Boyd-Barrett, Bowling Green

State University, USA

This book series will interrogate

and illuminate the mutually shaping

relationship between war and media as

transformative of contemporary society,

politics and culture.

Forthcoming in 2011

Hollywood and the CIA

Media, Defense and Subversion

Oliver Boyd-Barrett, David Herrera and

James Baumann

This book analyses representations in Hollywood film

of the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA).

The book examines movies sampled from the each of

five decades: the 1960s, 1970s, 1980s, 1990s, 2000s,

and explores four main issues: the relative prominence

of the CIA; the extent to which these movies appeared

to be overtly political; the degree to which they were

favorable or unfavorable to the CIA; and their relative

attitude to the “business” of intelligence. A final chapter

considers the question: do these Hollywood texts appear

to function ideologically to “normalize” the CIA? If so,

might this suggest the further hypothesis that many CIA

movies assist audiences with reconciling two sometimes

fundamental opposites: often gruesome covert CIA

activity for questionable goals and at enormous expense,

on the one hand, and the values and procedures of

democratic society, on the other.

July 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78006-3: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Military Media Management

Negotiating the Frontline

Sarah Maltby, City University, London, UK

This book argues that we are moving towards an

increasingly ‘Mediated War’, where the practice of war

is enacted through, involves, and is dependent upon

media reportage, from the strategic and political

justification of a war campaign to the tactical ways

in which it is actually conducted.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. What is Media

Operations? 3. The Shaping of Military Media Management:

Organisation through Interaction 4. The Aim of Media

Operations: Mulitiple Audiences, Generating Responses

5. Defining Military Action: Strategies and Limitations

6. Performing Military Impression Management

7. Reconfiguring the Battle Space: Impression

Management and ‘Mediated War’. Bibliography

June 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58005-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Global Terrorism

and New Media

The Post-Al Qaeda Generation

Philip Seib, University of Southern California, USA

and Dana M. Janbek, Lasell College, USA

Global Terrorism and New Media

carefully examines the content of

terrorist websites and extremist

television programming to

provide a comprehensive look

at how terrorist groups use new

media today.

Based partly on a content

analysis of discussion boards

and forums, the authors share

their findings on how terrorism

1.0 is migrating to 2.0 where

the interactive nature of new media is used to build

virtual organization and community. Although the

creative use of social networking tools such as Facebook

may advance the reach of terrorist groups, the impact of

their use of new media remains uncertain. The book

pays particular attention to terrorist media efforts

directed at women and children, which are evidence of

the long-term strategy that some terrorist organizations

have adopted, and the relationship between terrorists’

media presence and actual terrorist activity. This volume

also looks at the future of terrorism online and analyzes

lessons learned from counterterrorism strategies.

This book will be of much interest to students of

terrorism studies, media and communication studies,

security studies and political science.

Selected Contents: 1. Communicating Terror 2. High

Tech Terror: Al Qaeda and Beyond 3. Terrorists’ Online

Strategies 4. Targeting the Young 5. Women and Terrorism

6. Terrorism’s Online Future 7. Responding to Terrorism

August 2010: 234 x 156: 160pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77961-6: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77962-3: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-84537-0

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Radicalisation and the Media

Legitimising Violence in the New Media

Edited by Andrew Hoskins, University of

Nottingham, UK, Awan Akil, Royal Holloway,

University of London, UK and Ben O’Loughlin,

Royal Holloway, University of London, UK

This book examines the circulation and effects of

jihadist discourse by analysing online and media

coverage of radicalisation and acts of political violence,

and audience responses.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Problem of

Radicalisation 2. Jihadist Spaces of Legitimation 3. Antagonistic

Media 4. Big Media: The Re-mediation of jihad 5. Audiences

and Publics 6. Legitimising Jihadist Violence: The Yazidi Girl

7. Conclusion: The Utility of De-Radicalisation? Bibliography

January 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55035-2: £75.00

For more information, visit:


HuMaN seCuriTy

HuMaN seCuriTy

Forthcoming in 2011

The Routledge Handbook

of Human Security

Edited by Mary Martin, London School of Economics,

UK and Taylor Owen, Oxford University, UK

This Handbook will serve as a standard reference guide

to the subject of human security, which has grown

greatly in importance over the past 15 years, since the

concept was first promoted by the UNDP in its 1993

and 1994 Human Development Reports.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Concepts and

Contexts 1. Birth of a Discourse 2. Filling the Security Gap:

HS vs HR vs Human Development 3. Broad or Narrow: The

Definition Debate 4. The Critical View of Human Security

5. From Competition to Convergence: Human and National

Security Part 2: Global Policy Challenges 6. Violence and

Conflict 7. Development/Poverty 8. Disasters 9. Environment

10. Economics and Human security 11. Health

Part 3: Applications 12. Canada and Human Security

13. Japan 14. European Union 15. African Union 16. US:

Rethinking Counter Insurgency 17. Asia 18. Changing

Violence in Latin America Part 4: Methodologies and

Tools 19. Indicators: Sally Stares 20. Mapping 21. The Use

of Force 22. International Law 23. Gendering Human

Security 24. Psychology

July 2011: 246 x 174: 384pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58128-8: £110.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Human Security, Transnational

Crime and Human Trafficking

Asian and Western Perspectives

Edited by Shiro Okubo, Ritsumeikan University,

Japan and Louise Shelley, George Mason

University, USA

Series: Routledge Transnational Crime and Corruption

This book offers a timely analysis of transnational crime,

human trafficking and the impact on human security.

Selected Contents: Preface: Origin and Objective of the

Human Security Project Part 1: Human Security and

Transnational Crime 1. Human Security and Transnational

Crime 2. Transnational Organized Crime: The German

Response 3. International Organized Crime Operating in

Western Europe: The Judicial and Police Approach Against

Organized Crime in the European Union 4. Canada’s New

Concerted Efforts to Combat Transnational Organized Crime:

New Concerns, Emerging New Enforcement Practices, and

New Legislation 5. Japanese Crime Situation and

Transnational Organized Crime 6. Drug Trafficking and

Korea 7. Organized Crime Control and Drug Prevention

Strategy: Thai Perspective Part 2: Human Security and

Human Trafficking 8. International Human Trafficking:

An Important Component of Transnational Crime

9. The European Union Effort to Combat Illegal Migration,

Smuggling and Trafficking in Human Beings: Impact on

Spanish Law 10. Trafficking into the United States and

Western Hemisphere from Asia 11. Current Situation of

Migrant Women Employed in the Sex and Entertainment

Sector of Korea 12. Japanese Experience and Response

in Combating Trafficking

January 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43701-1: £80.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


Human Security, Law and the

Prevention of Terrorism

Andrej Zwitter, University of Groningen,

the Netherlands

Series: Routledge Advances in International Relations

and Global Politics

Combining social science research with legal sociology

and international law, this book examines the important

questions of which threats to human security lead to

terrorism and what can be done by the international

community in response.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Part 1: Theories

2. Working Definition of Human Security 3. An International

Legal Perspective on Prevention of Terrorism and Human

Security 4. Human Security Measurement 5. A Root Cause

Approach for Political Violence 6. Ideology and the

Mobilization of Terrorism 7. Capabilities and Opportunities:

From Terrorism to Conflict Part 2: Application 8. Overview

of Action by the UN on Terrorism Prevention 9. Humanitarian

Aid’s Constrains of Adressing Root Causes 10. The

Comprehensive Root Cause Approach: Application of

the Framework Developed 11. Conclusion Appendices

October 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58201-8: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83979-9

For more information, visit:


Truth Commissions and

Transitional Societies

The Impact on Human Rights and


Eric Wiebelhaus-Brahm, University of Colorado, USA

Series: Security and Governance

’This ground-breaking study

of truth commissions is

essential reading … Its

mixture of qualitative case

studies and quantitative

analysis offers new rigor to

the assessment of truth

commissions. His findings,

that truth commissions have

negative effects on human

rights in the near term, and

negligible impact on

democratization, should be

carefully considered by practitioners and scholars

of transitional justice.’ – Chandra Lekha Sriram,

University of East London, UK

Selected Contents: Part 1: Truth-Seeking as an Article

of Faith 1. An Inconvenient Truth 2. Theorizing Truth

Commission Expectations Part 2: Experiments in Truth

3. South Africa’s Paradigmatic Truth and Reconciliation

Commission 4. Chile’s Persistent Past 5. Truth and

Peacebuilding in El Salvador 6. Historical Oblivion in Uganda

Part 3: Truth Commissions in Cross-National Context

7. Truth Commissions, Human Rights, and Democracy

Around the World Part 4: The Promise and Pitfalls

of Truth Commissions 8. The Consequences of Truth

January 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55321-6: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-55322-3: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-86202-5

For more information, visit:




2nd Edition

Unspeakable Truths

Transitional Justice and the Challenge

of Truth Commissions

Priscilla B. Hayner, International Center for

Transitional Justice

In a sweeping review of forty truth commissions, Priscilla

Hayner delivers a definitive exploration of the global

experience in official truth-seeking after widespread

atrocities. When Unspeakable Truths was first published

in 2001, it quickly became a classic, helping to define

the field of truth commissions and the broader arena

of transitional justice. This second edition is fully

updated and expanded, covering twenty new

commissions formed in the last ten years, analyzing

new trends, and offering detailed charts that assess the

impact of truth commissions and provide comparative

information not previously available.

Placing the increasing number of truth commissions

within the broader expansion in transitional justice,

Unspeakable Truths surveys key developments and new

thinking in reparations, international justice, healing

from trauma, and other areas. The book challenges

many widely-held assumptions, based on hundreds of

interviews and a sweeping review of the literature. This

book will help to define how these issues are addressed

in the future.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Confronting Past

Crimes: Transitional Justice and the Phenomenon of Truth

Commissions 3. Why a Truth Commission? 4. The Five

Strongest Truth Commissions 5. Other Illustrative Truth

Commissions 6. What is the Truth? 7. The Truth About

Women and Men 8. Truth and Justice: A Careful but Critical

Relationship 9. Truth Commissions and the International

Criminal Court 10. Naming Names of Perpetrators

11. Healing from the Past 12. Truth and Reparations

13. Reconciliation and Reforms 14. Leaving the Past Alone

15. When, How, and Who: Basic Questions of Methodology

and Operations 16. Reflections: Looking Forward

August 2010: 229 x 152: 376pp

Hb: 978-0-415-87202-7: £95.00

Pb: 978-0-415-80635-0: £25.99

eBook: 978-0-203-86782-2

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies


To ProTeCT


To ProTeCT

Forthcoming in 2011

Routledge Handbook of the

Responsibility to Protect

Edited by W. Andy Knight, University of Alberta,

Canada and Frazer Egerton

This Handbook offers a comprehensive examination

of the Responsibility to Protect norm in world politics,

which aims to end mass atrocities against civilians.

This Handbook will be the authoritative guide to the

Responsibility to Protect. It gathers the most respected

and insightful voices to address key issues related to

this emerging norm. The chapters offer a comprehensive

and coherent account of the development of the

Responsibility to Protect, the issues that will likely

determine the extent to which its achievements match its

promise, and opinions about – and possible applications

of – this norm in various regions around the world.

This book will be of much interest to students of the

Responsibility to Protect, humanitarian intervention,

genocide, human rights, international law, international

organisations, security studies and IR.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: The Concept

of R2P 1. From Sovereign Responsibility to R2P 2. The

Responsibility to Prevent 3. The Responsibility to React

4. The Responsibility to Rebuild 5. The Journey within the

Organisation: The Evolution of R2P and the United Nations

6. NGOs and the Normative Architecture of the Responsibility

to Protect 7. The Promise and Achievements of R2P 8. The

Limits of R2P Part 2: Developing and Operationalising

R2P 9. The Unfinished Business of R2P 10. Who Speaks for

Whom? R2P and the Question of Authority and Thresholds

for Action 11. Who Should Act? Collective Responsibility

and R2P 12. R2P and Natural Disasters 13. Gender & the

Responsibility to Protect 14. R2P and Protecting Children in

Conflict Zones 15. The Need for Leadership 16. Mobilising

the Troops: Generating the Political will to Act Part 3: The

View from over Here 17. South Asia and R2 18. R2P in

the Asia Pacific 19. Latin America and R2P 20. West Africa

and R2P 21. R2P and the Horn of Africa 22. R2P in the

Middle East. Conclusion

April 2011: 246 x 174: 432pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60075-0: £125.00

For more information, visit:




resPoNsibiliTy To ProTeCT

Global Politics and the

Responsibility to Protect

Series edited by Alex J. Bellamy, Griffith

University, Australia, Sara E. Davies,

Queensland University of Technology,

Australia and Monica Serrano, City

University of New York, USA

This book series aims to gather the best new

thinking about the Responsibility to Protect

into a core set of volumes that provides a

definitive account of the principle, its

implementation, and role in crises, reflecting

a plurality of views and regional perspectives.

Forthcoming in 2011

The Responsibility to Protect

in Latin America

A New Map

Edited by Monica Serrano, City University of New

York, USA and Claudio Fuentes, Diego Portales

University, Santiago, Chile

This books assesses the opportunities for the normative

and practical advancement of the Responsibility to

Protect (R2P) in Latin America.

Selected Contents: Introduction Claudio Fuentes and

Mónica Serrano Part 1: Mapping the Responsibility to

Protect in Latin America 1. Argentina and the R2P:

Foreign Policy and Human Rights Carina Solmirano 2. Brazil,

the R2P and the Shaping of Regional Order Marcelo Biato

Fortuna 3. Small Country, Big Challenges: R2P in Chile’s

Foreign Policy Claudio Fuentes and Claudia Fuentes 4. Costa

Rica and R2P: Trailblazer or Mouthpiece of the North? Jorge

A. Ballestero 5. Mexico and the R2P: from Non-Intervention

to Active Engagement? Mónica Serrano and Diego Dewar

6. Guatemala: A Test-case for the R2P? Manolo E. Vela

Castañeda 7. Bolivia: Violence in Pando & the R2P George

Gray Molina and Gustavo Bonifaz 8. Colombia: A Free-rider

with a Vested Interest in the (Non)-Development of R2P?

Diego Dewar and Annette Idler Part 3: Implementing the

Responsibility to Protect 9. Preventing and Responding

to Mass Atrocities: The Role of National Human Rights

Institutions Thomas Pegram 10. Developing R2P Regional

Institutional Capacities Thomas Legler 11. Latin American

Responsibilities in Vulnerable States: The Case of Haiti

Mónica Hirst. Select Bibliography

May 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78221-0: £75.00

For more information, visit:



Global Politics and the

Responsibility to Protect

From Words to Deeds

Alex J. Bellamy, Griffith University, Australia

This book provides an in-depth

introduction to, and analysis

of, the issues relating to the

implementation of the recent

Responsibility to Protect principle

in international relations

Concentrating mainly on

implementation challenges

including the prevention of

genocide and mass atrocities,

strengthening the UN’s capacity

to respond, and the role of

regional organizations, this book introducing readers to

contemporary debates on R2P and provides the first

book-length analysis of the implementation agenda.

The book will be of great interest to students of the

responsibility to protect, humanitarian intervention,

human rights, foreign policy, security studies and IR

and politics in general.

December 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56735-0: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-56736-7: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-83716-0

For more information, visit:



Humanitarian Intervention and

the Responsibility to Protect

Security and Human Rights

Cristina G. Badescu, University of Toronto, Canada

This book explores attempts to develop a more

acceptable account of the principles and mechanisms

associated with humanitarian intervention, which has

become known as the ‘Responsibility to Protect’ (R2P).

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Humanitarian Intervention

and the Responsibility to Protect Part 1: R2P’s Theoretical

Weight 2. The Responsibility to Protect: Sovereignty and

Human Rights 3. Who Authorizes Interventions? 4. Who

Conducts Interventions? Part 2: R2P’s Practical Dimensions

5. From Concept to Norm 6. From Normative Development to

Implementation 7. Conclusion. Bibliography

November 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58627-6: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83454-1

For more information, visit:



The Responsibility

to Protect

Norms, Laws and the Use of Force in

International Politics

Ramesh Thakur, University of Waterloo, Canada

This volume is a collection of the key writings of

Professor Ramesh Thakur on norms and laws regulating

the international use of force.

The adoption of the Responsibility to Protect (R2P)

principle by world leaders assembled at the UN summit

in 2005 is widely acknowledged to represent one of the

great normative advances in international politics since

1945. The author has been involved in this shift from the

dominant norm of non-intervention to R2P as an actor,

public intellectual and academic and has been a key

thinker in this process. These essays represent the

author’s writings on R2P, including reference to test

cases as they arose, such as with Cyclone Nargis in

Myanmar in 2008.

Comprising essays by a key thinker and agent in the

Responsibility to Protect debates, this book will be of

much interest to students of international politics,

human rights, international law, war and conflict studies,

international security and IR in general.

December 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-78168-8: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-78169-5: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website



2nd Edition


A Comprehensive Introduction

Adam Jones, University of British Columbia

Okanagan, Canada

Genocide: A Comprehensive

Introduction is the most

wide-ranging textbook on

genocide yet published. The

book is designed as a text for

upper-undergraduate and

graduate students, as well as a

primer for non-specialists and

general readers interested in

learning about one of

humanity’s enduring blights.

Fully updated to reflect the

latest thinking in this rapidly

developing field, this new edition:

• drovides an introduction to genocide as both a

historical phenomenon and an analytical-legal concept,

including an extended discussion of the concept of

genocidal intent, and the dynamism and contingency

of genocidal processes

• discusses the role of state-building, imperialism, war,

and social revolution in fueling genocide

• supplies a wide range of full-length case studies of

genocides worldwide, each with an accompanying


• explores perspectives on genocide from the social

sciences, including psychology, sociology,

anthropology, political science/international relations,

and gender studies

• considers ’The Future of Genocide,’ with attention to

historical memory and genocide denial; initiatives for

truth, justice, and redress; and strategies of

intervention and prevention.

Written in clear and lively prose, liberally sprinkled

with over 100 illustrations and maps, and including

personal testimonies from genocide survivors, Genocide:

A Comprehensive Introduction has established itself

as the core textbook of the new generation of

genocide scholarship. An accompanying website

(www.genocidetext.net) features a broad selection

of supplementary materials, teaching aids, and

Internet resources.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Overview 1. The

Origins of Genocide 2. State and Empire;War and Revolution

Part 2: Cases 3. Genocide of Indigenous Peoples 4. The

Ottoman Destruction of Christian Minorities 5. Stalin and

Mao 6. The Jewish Holocaust 7. Cambodia and the Khmer

Rouge 8. Bosnia and Kosovo 9. Apocalypse in Rwanda

Part 3: Social Science Perspectives 10. Psychological

Perspectives 11. The Sociology and Anthropology of

Genocide 12. Political Science and International Relations

13. Gendering Genocide Part 4: The Future of Genocide

14. Memory, Forgetting and Denial 15. Justice, Truth and

Redress 16. Strategies of Intervention and Prevention

August 2010: 246 x 174: 656pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48618-7: £80.00

Pb: 978-0-415-48619-4: £24.99

eBook: 978-0-203-84696-4

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

New Directions in Genocide


Adam Jones, University of British Columbia

Okanagan, Canada

This edited books seeks to

capture the range of new

approaches, theories and

case studies in the field of

genocide studies. It unfolds

in three sections:

• The first section focuses on

broad theories of comparative

genocide, including a number

of different perspectives.

• The second section critically

reconsiders core themes of genocide studies, including

humanitarian intervention and the role of bystanders;

and unfolds a range of challenging new directions,

including the forcible transfer of children as a

genocidal strategy, cultural genocide, the art and

architecture of genocide, gender and genocide,

structural violence, and the novel application of

remote-sensing technologies to the detection and

study of genocide.

• The third and final section is case-study focused,

seeking to place both canonical and little-known cases

of genocide in broader comparative perspective. Cases

analyzed include genocide in North America, the Nazi

Holocaust, the Rwandan genocide of 1994, and the

Indonesian genocide of 1965-66.

The combination of cutting-edge scholarship and

innovative approaches to familiar subjects makes this

essential reading for all students and scholars in the

field of genocide studies.

Selected Contents: Introduction Adam Jones

Part 1: Theories 1. From Definition to Process: The Effects

and Roots of Genocide Benjamin Lieberman 2. Genocidal

Social Practices Daniel Feierstein 3. The Morality of Genocide

Christopher J. Powell Part 2: Themes 4. Cultural Genocide:

Destroying Material Culture, Destroying Identity Pamela De

Condappa 5. Genocidal Masculinities Elisa von Joeden-

Forgey 6. (In)visible Males: A Critical Assessment of UN

Gender Mainstreaming Policies in the Congolese Gendercide

Paula Drumond Rangel Campos 7. Tracking Evidence of the

Genocide through Environmental Change: Applying Remote

Sensing to the Study of Genocide 8. Genocide and

Structural Violence: Charting the Terrain Adam Jones

9. Moral Bystanders and Mass Violence Ernesto Verdeja

Part 3: Cases 10. Revisiting the American Genocide Debate

Benjamin Madley 11. Globalizing Nazi Crimes: A Postcolonial

Reading of the Holocaust Jürgen Zimmerer 12. Colonialism,

Ethnicity and Genocide in the African Great Lakes Region: A

Transnational Approach Dominik J. Schaller 13. South Asia

and Genocide: A Case for Prevention Benita Sumita

March 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49596-7: £75.00

Pb: 978-0-415-49597-4: £22.99

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

geNoCide 43

The International Politics

of Mass Atrocities

The Case of Darfur

Edited by David R. Black, Dalhousie University,

Canada and Paul D. Williams, George Washington

University, USA

Series: Security and Governance

’This is an excellent volume:

well-conceived, designed,

researched and written;

represents the very best

of case-specific scholarship

on the difficult (issue) of

collective responses to

genocidal conflict; (N)icely

integrates IR theory and

the details of this particular

case. The study blends well

broader concerns such as

the existence and capacity

of an ’international society’ and the tenaciously

problematic case of Darfur. It gives the international

response to Darfur a clear yardstick and we gain real

insights into the challenges of the context and the

failures of a robust and effective international

response.’ – Tim Sisk, University of Denver, USA

Selected Contents: Introduction: International Society and

the Crisis in Darfur Paul D. Williams and David R. Black

Part 1: Regional Politics 1. The Government of Sudan

and the Darfurian Armed Groups I.D.F. and Munzoul Assal

2. Regional Politics and the Darfur Crisis Lee J.M. Seymour

Part 2: Multilateral Politics 3. The United Nations Security

Council Michael MacKinnon 4. The African Union Cristina

Badescu and Linnea Bergholm 5. The European Union Rory

Keene and Asbjorn Wee 6. The International Criminal Court

William A. Schabas Part 3: Bilateral Politics 7. The United

States Scott Stedjan and Colin Thomas-Jensen 8. The People’s

Republic of China Ian Taylor 9. The United Kingdom Paul D.

Williams 10. France Bruno Charbonneau 11. Canada David

R. Black. Conclusion David R. Black and Paul D. Williams

January 2010: 234 x 156: 288pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55902-7: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-55903-4: £25.99

eBook: 978-0-203-86217-9

For more information, visit:


3rd Edition

Century of Genocide

Critical Essays and Eyewitness Accounts

Edited by Samuel Totten, University of Arkansas,

Fayetteville, USA

2008: 229 x 152: 672pp

Hb: 978-0-415-99084-4: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-99085-1: £26.99

eBook: 978-0-203-89043-1

For more information, visit:




The Genocide Studies


Edited by Samuel Totten, University of Arkansas,

Fayetteville, USA and Paul R. Bartrop, Deakin

University, Australia

This thorough overview of all

aspects of the field of genocide

studies brings together for the

first time classic and

contemporary writings from

some of the most noted

scholars writing on genocide in

the fields of genocide studies,

political science, history, and


Selected Contents:

Part 1: Definitions of Genocide

Part 2: Theories and Causes of

Genocide Part 3: Genocidal Crimes Part 4: The Complexities

of the Prevention and Intervention of Genocide

Part 5: Prosecution of Crimes Against Humanity

and Genocide Part 6: Denial of Genocide

2009: 254 x 178: 568pp

Hb: 978-0-415-95394-8: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-95395-5: £27.99

For more information, visit:


TerrorisM sTudies



Forthcoming in 2011

Routledge Handbook

of Terrorism Research

Research, Theories and Concepts

Edited by Alex Schmid, Terrorism Research Initiative,

Austria, Albert Jongman, Ministry of Defence, the

Netherlands and Eric Price, International Atomic

Energy Agency, Austria

This book is a monumental

collection of definitions,

conceptual frameworks,

paradigmatic formulations, and

bibliographic sources, which is a

vital resource for the expanding

community of researchers on

the subject of terrorism.

This book will be essential

reading for all students of

terrorism, political science and

Security Studies, as well as

policymakers and professionals in the security field.

Selected Contents: 1. Acknowledgments 2. Introduction

Alex P. Schmid 3. The Problem of Defining Terrorism Alex P.

Schmid 3.1. Appendix: 250 Definitions of Terrorism Alex P.

Schmid and J. Easson 4. Typologies of Terrorism Sarah Marsden

and Alex P. Schmid 5. Theories of Terrorism Bradley McAllister

and Alex P. Schmid 5.1. Appendix: Hypotheses on Root

Causes of Terrorism Alex P. Schmid 5.2. Appendix: Chronology

of Al -Qaeda Communiques from Osama Bin Laden and

Ayman al Zawahiri D. Holbrook 6. Databases on Terrorism

Neil G. Bowie and Alex P. Schmid 6.1. World Directory of

Extremist, Terrorist and other Organizations Associated with

Guerrilla Warfare, Political Violence, Protest and Organized

and Cyber Crime A.J. Jongman 6.2 Library and Internet

Resources for Research on Terrorism E. Price 7. The Literature

of Terrorism Alex P.Schmid 8. Bibliography of Terrorism Gillian

Duncan and Alex P. Schmid 9. Glossary and List of Acronyms

on Terrorism and Counter-Terrorism Alex P. Schmid

March 2011: 246 x 174: 696pp

Hb: 978-0-415-41157-8: £125.00

For more information, visit:


Cass Series on Political Violence

Series edited by Paul Wilkinson,

University of St. Andrews, UK and

David Rapoport, UCLA, USA

This book series is a useful taxonomy of

terror and violence through comparative

and historical analysis in both national

and international spheres. Each book

discusses origins, organisational dynamics

and outcomes of particular forms and

expressions of political violence.

2nd Edition

Terrorism Today

Christopher C. Harmon

’… a masterly survey of

the big picture of world

violence… provides many

useful strategy

recommendations which

Western governments would

do well to study.’ – Times

Literary Supplement

‘This is a remarkably

comprehensive survey and

a helpful reference, including

valuable resources such as

basic information about the major international

organizations and a glossary of terrorist groups

at the end.’ – Joint Force Quarterly

Selected Contents: Foreword Paul Wilkinson. Introduction

1. Politics and Policies 2. Strategies of Terrorist Groups

3. Operations: Funding Terror 4. Technologies and Tactics

5. Counterterrorism 6. How Terror Groups End. Glossary

of Terrorist Groups

2007: 246 x 174: 248pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77300-3: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77301-0: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-93358-9

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Democracy and the

War on Terror

Civil Liberties and the Fight Against Terrorism

Leonard Weinberg and William Eubank, both

at University of Nevada, Reno, USA

This new volume focuses on the relationships between

democratic government, open societies and political


Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. Terrorism and the New

Democracies 3. Terrorism in Long-Established Democracies

4. Terrorism and the Breakdown of Democracy 5. The Price

Democracies Pay for Fighting Terrorism 6. Conclusions

January 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77033-0: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77034-7: £23.99

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Understanding Terrorism

and Political Violence

The Life Cycle of Birth, Growth,

Transformation, and Demise

Dipak K. Gupta, San Diego State University, USA

’Highly recommended’ – R.G.

Mainuddin, Choice

’Reading this book, it is clear

that it is a labor of love. A

combination of personal

detail (a terrific opening

section that will surprise

many familiar with his

previous work), literary

observations, crossdisciplinary


that never feel clumsily

juxtaposed, and examples

drawn from across conceptual boundaries provide

the reader with a richly potent stew of material to

contemplate. What Gupta ultimately provides in

his dynamic conceptual framework is a research

agenda, rich for potential hypothesis testing.

Gupta rises to the challenge laid down by Walter

Reich and others in terrorism studies by moving

beyond the confines of individual disciplinary

perspectives, and for that alone should be praised.

That he does so by providing a thoughtful, learned

volume is even more reason to read this important

and essential book.’ – John Horgan, Pennsylvanian

State University, USA

Selected Contents: Foreword Martha Crenshaw.

Introduction. Theories on Origins of Movements. Selfish

Altruist: Modeling the Mind of a Terrorist. The Dynamics of

Dissent: A Theoretical Perspective. Faith, Nationalism, and

Class Warfare: Birth of a Movement. Growth of Rebellion.

A Marriage Made in Hell? Terrorism and Organized Crime.

Terrorism’s Trap: A Winnable War? Appendix A. Appendix B

2008: 234 x 156: 304pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77164-1: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77165-8: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-93027-4

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Irish Republican Terrorism

and Politics

A Comparative Study of the Official

and the Provisional IRA

Kacper Rekawek, Warsaw School of Social Sciences

and Humanities, Poland

This book examines the post-ceasefire evolutions and

histories of the main Irish republican terrorist factions,

and the interconnected character of politics and

militarism within these.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. The Official

Republican Movement: Military Evolution 1972-92

3. The Provisional Republican Movement: Military Evolution

1994-2005 4. Thematic Analysis of Official Republican and

Provisional Republican Post-Ceasefire Militarism 5. The

Official Republican Movement: Political Evolution 1972-92

6. The Provisional Republican Movement: Political Evolution

1994-2005 7. Thematic Analysis of Official Republican and

Provisional Republican Post-Ceasefire Politics 8. Conclusions.


April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58801-0: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Leaving Terrorism Behind

Individual and Collective Disengagement

Edited by Tore Bjorgo, Norwegian Institute of

International Affairs (NUPI), Oslo, Norway and

John Horgan, Pennsylvania State University, USA

While there has been a

growing awareness of the

need to understand and prevent

processes of radicalization into

terrorism, disengagement and

deradicalization from terrorism

have long been neglected areas

in research on terrorism. This

book uses empirical data to

explore how and why individuals

and groups disengage from

terrorism, and what can be

done to facilitate it.

Selected Contents: Foreword 1. Introduction Tore Bjørgo

and John Horgan Part 1: Processes 2. Individual

Disengagement: A Psychological Analysis John Horgan

3. Processes of Disengagement from Violent Groups of the

Extreme Right Tore Bjørgo 4. How Terrorist Campaigns End

Audrey Kurth Cronin 5. Leaving Left-Wing Terrorism in Italy:

A Sociological Analysis Donatella della Porta 6. Leaving

Terrorism Behind in Northern Ireland and the Basque Country:

Reassessing Anti-Terrorist Policies and the ’Peace Processes’

Rogelio Alonso 7. The Renunciation of Violence by Egyptian

Jihadi Organisations Diaa Rashwan Part 2: Programmes

8. Exit from Right-Wing Extremist Groups: Lessons from

Disengagement Programmes in Norway, Sweden and Germany

Tore Bjørgo, Sara Grunenberg and Jaap van Donselaar

9. Disengagement and Beyond: A Case Study of Demobilization

in Colombia Marcella Ribetti 10. De-Radicalisation and

Rehabilitation Programmes Targeting Militant Jihadists:

An Overview Richard Barrett and Laila Bokhari 11. Opening

up the Jihadi Debate: Yemen’s Committee for Dialogue

Christopher Boucek, Shazadi Beg, and John Horgan 12. The

Rehabilitation of Jemaah Islamiyah Detainees in Southeast

Asia: A Preliminary Assessment Zachary Abuza 13. Extremist

Reeducation and Rehabilitation in Saudi Arabia Christopher

Boucek 14. Pakistan: In Search of a Disengagement Strategy

Shazadi Beg and Laila Bokhari Part 3: Conclusions

15. Conclusions Tore Bjørgo and John Horgan

2008: 234 x 156: 328pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77667-7: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77668-4: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-88475-1

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

TerrorisM sTudies 45

Forthcoming in 2011

Conducting Terrorism

Field Research

A Guide

Edited by Adam Dolnik, University of Wollongong,


Series: Contemporary Terrorism Studies

This book offers a detailed and practically oriented guide

to the challenges of conducting terrorist fieldwork.

The past decade has seen an explosion of research into

terrorism. However, while there is an increasing interest

among terrorism specialists in conducting such research,

there is no single volume providing prospective field

researchers with a guideline to such work.

This edited volume aims to fill this gap and offers

a collection of articles from experienced authors

representing different risk groups, disciplines,

methodological approaches, regional specializations,

and other context-specific aspects. Each contributor

provides a road-map to their own research, describing

planning and preparation phases, the formalities

involved in getting into conflict zones, gaining access to

sources, managing contacts, interviewing militants in the

field, detailed discussion on the risks involved, ethical

dilemmas, translation issues, effective interviewing and

rapport-building steps, and other practical aspects of

conducting field research. The text will also help

researchers set realistic expectations of how the process

of interviewing militants and secretive government

sources in conflict zones is organized, what the likely

outcomes are, and assist with many other practical issues

such as how to navigate through challenges posed by

government forces unsympathetic to researchers, how

to reduce risk of physical harm when travelling in conflict

zones, how to behave at hostile checkpoints, how to

answer specific questions militants tend to ask prior and

during interviews. The end product is a ’how to’ guide

to field research on terrorism, which will be of much

value to terrorism experts and novices alike, providing

detailed insights into the challenges and obstacles in

doing field research on terrorism, as well as advice on

how these can be overcome.

This book will be of much interest to students and

researchers of terrorism studies, war and conflict studies,

criminology, IR and security studies.

Selected Contents: Introduction Adam Dolnik 1. The

Need for Field Research on Terrorism Adam Dolnik 2. A

More Accessible Population?: Interviewing Former Terrorists

John Horgan 3. Field Research on Counterterrorism:

Interviewing Government Sources Brian Jackson and Lindsey

Clutterbuck 4. Interviewing al Qaida Jason Burke and Peter

Bergen 5. The Participant Observer Method Keith Akins and

Gerard Chaliand 6. The Use of Surveys in Field Research

on Terrorism Christine Fair 7. Field Research on Terrorism

in Colombia Michael Kenney 8. Field Research on Terrorism

in Africa Anneli Botha 9. Field Research on Terrorism in

Southeast Asia 10. Researching Terrorism in Pakistan: An

Insider’s Perspective Amir Rana 11. Interviewing Islamist

Militants as a Woman 12. How to Research ’Us’?: A

Terrorists’ Perspective Conclusions: Researching Terrorism

in the Field: A ’How To’ Guide Adam Dolnik

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60930-2: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-60931-9: £23.99

For more information, visit:



TerrorisM sTudies

Walking Away from


Accounts of Disengagement from Radical

and Extremist Movements

John Horgan, Pennsylvania State University, USA

‘John Horgan’s meticulous

research breaks new ground.

His acute understanding of

the complex factors that

can lead to disillusion and

withdrawal from terrorism

makes this book an

indispensable source for

academics and security

professionals.’ – Paul Wilkinson,

University of St. Andrews, UK

Selected Contents: Foreword.

Preface: A Personal Reflection on

Fieldwork 1. Qualities Are Not Causes 2. How, When and

Why Terrorism Ends 3. ’Prison was a good thing’ 4. ’I

volunteered’ 5. ’There is no conscious decision’ 6. ’A step

too far’ 7. ’They were once my people’ 8. ’I don’t believe

in integration’ 9. Conclusions Bibliography

2009: 234 x 156: 216pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43943-5: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-43944-2: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-87473-8

For more information, visit:



Fault Lines in Global Jihad

Organizational, Strategic and Ideological


Edited by Assaf Moghadam and Brian Fishman,

both at US Military Academy, West Point, USA

This book is a detailed discussion of the internal

problems and weaknesses of the global jihad movement

led by Al-Qaeda.

Selected Contents: Foreword Gen. (R) John P. Abizaid

1. Mapping the Global Jihad’s Endogenous Problems: A

Conceptual Framework Assaf Moghadam and Brian Fishman

Part 1: Strategy, Tactics, and Ideology 2. Takfir and

Violence against Muslims Mohammed Hafez 3. Strategists vs.

Doctrinarians Brynjar Lia 4. Strategic Fissures: The Near vs. Far

Enemy Debate Steven Brooke 5. Ideological Fissures: Al Qaeda

and the Revisionists Part 2: Relationships with Other

Muslim Groups 6. Global Jihad vs. Muslim Brotherhood

Marc Lynch 7. Global Jihad vs. the Shia Bernard Haykel

8. Global Jihad vs. Hamas Reuven Paz 9. Global Jihad vs.

Non-Arab Muslim Allies Anne Stenersen Part 3: Challenges

of Global Organization 10. Al Qaeda Central vs. Local

Affiliates Vahid Brown 11. Fault Lines in Cyberspace: Discord

in the Jihadist Web Forums Scott Sanford Part 4: Conclusion

10. Prospects for Exploiting the Jihadi Movement’s Challenges

Brian Fishman and Assaf Moghadam

September 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58624-5: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Negotiating with Terrorists

Strategy, Tactics, and Politics

Guy Olivier Faure, Sorbonne University, Paris,

France and I. William Zartman, Johns Hopkins

University, USA

This edited volume addresses the important question of

negotiating with terrorists, and offers recommendations

for best practice and processes.

Selected Contents: Introduction G.O. Faure and I. William

Zartman Part 1: How to Negotiate: Kidnapping the

Kidnappers Introductionto Part 1 1. Guidelines for

Negotiators with Terrorists Laurent Combalbert 2. Quantitative

and Qualitative Aspects of Kidnapping and Hostage Negotiation

Alex Schmid and P. Flemming 3. Talking to the Devil David

Pinder Part 2: Practical/Tactical: Freeing the Hostages

Introduction to Part 2 4. Terrorist Negotiating Strategy in

Lebanon Karen Feste 5. Negotiating in Beslan and Beyond

Adam Dolnik 6. Negotiating Visible and Hidden Agendas

Victor Kremenyuk 7. Negotiating The Grand Swap in

Khandahar P. Sahadevan Part 3: Conclusions 8. Lessons

for Practice G.O. Faure and I. William Zartman. Bibliography

February 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56629-2: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85559-1

For more information, visit:



Terrorism, Identity,

and Legitimacy

The Four Waves Theory and Political Violence

Edited by Jean Rosenfeld

This book argues that terrorism in the modern world

has occurred in four ’waves’ of forty years each. It

offers evidence-based explanations of terrorism, national

identity, and political legitimacy by leading scholars

from various disciplineswith contrasting perspectives

on political violence.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The Meaning of Political

Violence Jean E. Rosenfeld Part 1: The Four Waves Theory

and Global Terrorism 1. Looking for Waves of Terrorism

Karen Rasler and William R. Thompson 2. Waves of

International Terrorism: An Explanation of the Process by

which Ideas Flood the World Dipak K. Gupta 3. Technological

and Lone Operator Terrorism: Prospects for a Fifth Wave of

Global Terrorism Jeffrey D. Simon 4. David Rapoport and the

Study of Religiously-Motivated Terrorism Jeffrey Kaplan

Part 2: Terrorism: A Closer View 5. Ripples in the Waves:

Fantasies and Fashions Marc Sageman 6. The Fourth Terrorism

Wave: Is There a Religious Exception? Michael Barkun 7. The

Fourth Wave: Comparison of Jewish and Other Manifestations

of Religious Terrorism Ami Pedahzur and Arie Perliger 8. Action,

Reaction, and Overreaction: Assessing the Impact of Terrorism

upon States John Mueller 9. Backlash: Reactions against

Terrorism Studies Leonard Weinberg and William Eubank

Part 3: Identity, Legitimacy, and Political Violence

10. Before the Bombs There Were the Mobs: American

Experiences with Terror David C. Rapoport 11. The Politics

of Collective Identity: Contested Israeli Nationalisms Myron J.

Aronoff 12. South Africa’s Paradox of Violence and Legitimacy

Barry M. Schutz 13. Legitimacy, Culture of Political Violence

and Violence of Culture in Ethiopia Negussay Ayele

14. Contextual Issues in the Study of Domestic Violence:

A Malawi Case Study Ralph A. Young 15. The Myth of

Institutional Violence Ivan Strenski

December 2010: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57857-8: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83432-9

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

State Terrorism and

Human Rights

International Responses since the Cold War

Paul Wilkinson, University of St Andrews, UK

This book aims to improve our

understanding of the broad

trends in the use of political

violence by examining the use

of state terror in world politics.

There are numerous military

regimes and other forms of

dictatorship where the use of

terror techniques for internal

control is routine. While there

are some effective multilateral

measures that can be taken to

discourage and reduce state

sponsorship of terrorism as a weapon of intervention in

foreign states, the international community generally

and the major democracies in combination face huge

difficulties in attempting to influence those regimes that

are inflicting major human rights violations on their own

populations. For most states, the international norms of

non-intervention have tended to restrict government

and IGOs to expressions of humanitarian concern,

condemnatory resolutions at the UN, and perhaps

support for international economic sanctions against

the offending regime.

This book will analyse the major types of international

response to state terror since the Cold War and their

outcomes and wider implications for the future of

international relations. The conclusion will attempt to

develop proposals for more effective international

responses to state terror in full capability with

international law and the protection of human rights.

Selected Contents: 1. Concept and Typology of Regime Terror

2. Regime Terror as a Political Weapon in Modern History

3. Trends in the use of Terror by States Since the End of the

Cold War 4. Obstacles to International Action against State

Terror in the Post-Cold War International System 5. The Case

of Saddam Hussein’s Terror against the Kurds and the

International Response 6. Indonesian Terror against East Timor

Separatists and the International Response 7. The Use of

State Terror in Former Yugoslavia and the International Response

8. Terror in Rwanda in 1994 and the Failure of International

Response 9. Conclusions: Towards a More Effective International

Response to State Terror, based on Democratic Principles and

the Protection of Human Rights. Bibliography. Index

April 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47423-8: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-47424-5: £21.99

For more information, visit:


Terrorist Groups and

the New Tribalism

Terrorism’s Fifth Wave

Jeffrey Kaplan, University of Wisconsin, USA

The central focus of this book is a small but vitally important

group of movements that constitute a distinct ’fifth

wave’ of modern terrorism, here called the ’New Tribalism’.

Selected Contents: Introduction Part 1: Theory

1. Terrorism and Religious Violence 2. Rapoport’s Four

Waves Theory Revisited 3. The Fifth Wave Part 2: Praxis

4. The Lord’s Resistance Army 5. The Janjaweed in the

Sudan 6. Conclusion: The Fifth Wave?

February 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-45338-7: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85752-6

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website


Terrorism and the Olympics

Major Event Security and Lessons

for the Future

Edited by Anthony Richards, Peter Fussey and

Andrew Silke, all at University of East London, UK

The book aims to outline the progress, problems and

challenges of delivering a safe and secure Olympics in

the context of the contemporary serious and enduring

terrorist threat.

Selected Contents: 1. Towards an Understanding of

Terrorism and the Olympics Anthony Richards, Pete Fussey

and Andrew Silke 2. Terrorism, the Olympics and Sport:

Recent Events and Concerns for the Future Anthony Richards

3. Al Qaeda and the London Olympics Afzal Ashraf

4. Understanding Terrorist Target Selection Andrew Silke

5. Securing the Transport System Steve Swain 6. Surveillance

and the Olympic Spectacle Pete Fussey 7. Strategic Security

Planning and the Resilient Design of Olympic Sites Jon

Coaffee 8. Governing the Games in an Age of Uncertainty:

the Olympics and Organisational Responses to Risk Will

Jennings 9. The Role of the Private Security Industry David

Evans 10. The Challenge of Inter-Agency Coordination Keith

Weston 11. The European Union & the Promotion of Major

Event Security Within the EU Area Frank Gregory 12. Critical

Reflections on Securing the Olympics: Conclusions and Ways

Forward Anthony Richards, Pete Fussey and Andrew Silke

Appendix: Terrorist Threats to the Olympics, 1972-2016

Pete Fussey

November 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49939-2: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-83522-7

For more information, visit:


relaTed jourNal

Critical Studies on Terrorism

Forthcoming in 2011

Terrorist Rehabilitation and


New Approaches to Counter-Terrorism

Edited by Lawrence Rubin, Rohan Gunaratna,

IDSS, Singapore and Jolene Anne R. Jerard

This book seeks to explore the new frontiers in

counter-terrorism research, analyses and practice,

focusing on the imperative to rehabilitate terrorists.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Rohan Gunaratna

2. Terrorist Rehabilitation: A Global Imperative Rohan

Gunaratna Part 1: Case Studies from Southeast Asia

3. Terrorist Rehabilitation the Singapore Experience Ustaz

Mohamed Feisal 4. Terrorist Rehabilitation Malaysia’s

Experience Ustaz Iszam Padil 5. Terrorist Rehabilitation

Indonesia’s Experience Tito Karnavian Part 2: Case Studies

from South and Central Asia 6. Terrorist Rehabilitation

Strategies in Pakistan Tariq Pervez 7. The Rehabilitation of

Convicted Offenders of Terrorist Actions: Problems and

Solutions Tolibjon Umarov Part 3: Case Studies from the

Middle East 8. Terrorist Rehabilitation Iraq’s Experience

Douglas Stone 9. Terrorist Rehabilitation Saudi Arabia’s

Experience Abdulrahman AlHadlag 10. Counter-

Radicalisation and Disengagement in Saudi Arabia

Christopher Boucek 11. Dialogue and Its Effects on

Countering Terrorism Hamoud Abdulhameed AlHittar

12. The Process of Jihadist Deradicalization in Egypt Omar

Ashour 13. Non-Kinetic Approaches to Counter-Terrorism

in Egypt Lawrence Rubin Part 4: Case Study from North

Africa 14. Islamist Deradicalization in Algeria: The Case of

Islamic Salvation Army and Affiliated Militias Omar shour

Part 5: Case Studies from Europe 15. Terrorist

Rehabilitation Strategies in Spain Fernando Reinares

16. Extremist Disengagement in the UK: Context, Scope,

Methods and Results Tony Heal Key Themes in Terrorist

Rehabilitation 17. Deradicalization Arie Kruglanski and

Michele Gelfand 18. Probing the Jihadi Mindset Sohail

Abbas 19. Key Islamic Concepts Misinterpreted Terrorists

Ustaz Mohammed Bin Ali 19. Guantanamo Bay Lessons

Leant: Case Studies and Operations Mike Marks

20. Overview of the legal and Governance Frameworks

and Considerations in Anti-Terrorism and Rehabilitation

of Detainees: A Singapore Perspective Richard Magnus

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58293-3: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies


TerrorisM sTudies 47

The Psychology of


Edited by Andrew Silke, University of East London, UK

This edited book explores how

psychology can be used to

improve our understanding of

terrorism and counterterrorism.

This work firstly aims to provide

balanced and objective insight

into the psychology of terrorists;

what their motivations are, what

keeps them involved in terrorist

groups, and what eventually

forces most to end their active

involvement in terrorism.

Secondly, the contributors focus

on the challenging issue of how to respond to terrorism.

These chapters provide information for those concerned

with short-term tactical problems, as well as those looking

towards the more long-term strategic questions of

bringing an entire terrorist campaign to an end.

This innovative book will be of great interest to students

of terrorism and counter-terrorism, security studies,

psychology and politics, as well as security professionals

and military colleges.

Selected Contents: 1. The Psychology of Counterterrorism:

Critical Issues and Challenges Andrew Silke 2. Understanding

Terrorist Psychology Randy Borum 3. The Psychology of

Violent Radicalisation Brooke Rogers 4. Why People Support

Terrorism Reena Kumari 5. The Evolutionary Logic of Terrorism

Rick O’Gorman 6. The Internet and Terrorism Lorraine

Bowman-Grieve 7. The Impact of the Media on Terrorism

and Counterterrorism Deborah Browne and Andrew Silke

8. Disengaging from Terrorism Neil Ferguson 9. Terrorists and

Extremists in Prison: Psychological Issues in Management and

Reform Andrew Silke 10. Interrogation Tactics and Terrorist

Suspects John Pearse 11. Terrorist Tactics and Counter-

Terrorism Graeme Steven 12. Deterring Terrorism:

Target-Hardening, Surveillance and the Prevention of Terrorism

Pete Fussey 13. Countering the Psychological Impact of

Terrorism: Challenges for Homeland Security Anthony Richards

October 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55839-6: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-55840-2: £23.99

eBook: 978-0-203-84026-9

For more information, visit:


Editors: Marie Breen Smyth, Jeroen Gunning and Richard Jackson, (Founding Editor), all at Aberystwyth University, UK, George Kassimeris,

University of Wolverhampton, UK and Piers Robinson, The University of Manchester, UK

Critical Studies on Terrorism is an international, peer-reviewed, interdisciplinary journal. The journal seeks to publish quality research

on all aspects of terrorism, counter-terrorism and state terror.

A key aim of the journal is to both create space for robust, innovative research on terrorism, and to encourage fruitful intellectual

engagement between critical and orthodox accounts of terrorism. In particular, the editors are looking for empirical, theoretical and

policy-oriented articles that recognise the inherently problematic nature of the terrorism label, employ a critical-normative perspective broadly

defined, and challenge accepted orthodoxies. Research on terrorism employing methodological and disciplinary perspectives from outside the

poltical science and international relations paradigms is especially encouraged.

For more information on the journal, including subscription details, please visit: www.tandf.co.uk/journals/rter


TerrorisM sTudies

Contemporary Terrorism Studies

Forthcoming in 2011

Evaluating Counterterrorism


A Comparative Study

Beatrice de Graaf, Leiden University, the Netherlands

This study examines the counterterrorism policymaking

process from a historical perspective, and proposes a new

way to measure its impact on society and on terrorists.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: What Do the

Counter-Terrorists Want? 2. The Performative Power of

Counter-Terrorism 3. The Dutch Approach: Restrained

and Fragmented 4. West Germany: Democracy Under Fire

5. Counter-Terrorism in Italy: Deception or Mismanagement

6. Counter-Terrorism in the US: Countering Subversives,

Revolutionaries and Communists 7. The Performance of

Counterterrorism Policy 8. Conclusions. Bibliography

April 2011: 234 x 156: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59886-6: £75.00

For more information, visit:


International Terrorism


Comparative Dynamics and Responses

Edited by Asaf Siniver, University of Birmingham, UK

This edited volume brings together both western and

non-western approaches to counter-terrorism in the

post-9/11 era.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction Asaf Siniver 2. Security

and ‘Terror’ in the Middle East and North Africa: Drivers and

Limitations of Protest and ‘Terrorism’ Gerd Nonneman

3. Radicalism, Extremism and Government in North Africa

George Joffé 4. Strategic Confusion: America’s Conflicting

Strategies and the War on Terrorism David Hastings Dunn

and Oz Hassan 5. American Counter-Terrorism through the

Rewards for Justice Program, 1984-2008 Steve Hewitt

6. British Armed Forces and European Union Perspectives

on Countering Terrorism Major General Graham Messervy-

Whiting 7. The Development of the UK Intelligence

Community after 9/11 Sir Francis Richards 8. Israel and

the Al-Aqsa Intifada: The Conceptzia of Terror Clive Jones

9. Russia and Counter Terrorism: A Critical Appraisal Cerwyn

Moore and David Barnard-Wills 10. Fixing the Elusive: India

and the Foreignness of Terror Ted Svensson 11. Australian

Identity, Interventionism and the ‘War on Terror’ Jack Holland

and Matt McDonald 12. Counter-Terrorism in Southeast Asia

Post 9/11 Andrew T.H. Tan

March 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-55230-1: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85200-2

For more information, visit:



Talking to Terrorists

Concessions and the Renunciation of


Carolin Goerzig

This book examines the doctrine of giving no

concessions to terrorists, and uses empirical research to

establish whether there is any link between negotiating

with such groups and the spread of violence.

Selected Contents: 1. Questioning the No-Concessions-

Doctrine 2. Arguing for a Differentiated Picture 3. The

Jama’ah Islamiya’s Change of Means and the Reaction of the

Egyptian Jihad and Al Qaeda 4. The PLO’s Change of Ends

and the Reaction of Hamas 5. The AUC’s Change of Means

and the Reaction of the ELN 6. The PKK’s Change of Ends

and the Reaction of the Turkish Hezbollah 7. Implications for

Policy 8. Conclusion

May 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57997-1: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84697-1

For more information, visit:



Freedom and Terror

Reason and Unreason in Politics

Gabriel Weimann, University of Haifa, Israel and

Abraham Kaplan

This book examines reason and unreason in the legal

and political responses to terrorism.

Selected Contents: Foreword Carl Cohen 1. Reason: The

Age of Madness 2. Knowledge and Political Action 3. Politics,

Law and Behavioral Science 4. Historical Interpretation

5. The Politics of Protest 6. The Ethics of Terror 7. The

Psychodynamics of Terror 8. The Theater of Terror: Modern

Terrorism and the Mass Media 9. Moral Responsibilities and

Political Realities 10. The Ethics of Power 11. Values in

Decision Making 12. The Politics of Prejudice 13. In Defense

of Freedom 14. The Limits of Freedom. Bibliography

December 2010: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60598-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Democratic Responses

To Terrorism

Edited by Leonard Weinberg

Democratic Responses to

Terrorism tackles how to protect

democratic societies against

terrorist violence while, at the

same time, making sure that

the steps democracies take to

protect themselves do no

fundamental harm to the rule

of law and the rights of citizens.

2007: 229 x 152: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-96490-6: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-96491-3: £22.99

eBook: 978-0-203-93319-0

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Hamas and Suicide Terrorism

Multi-Causal and Multi-Level Approaches

Rashmi Singh, St. Andrews University, UK

Series: LSE International Studies Series

This book analyses the root causes of suicide terrorism at

both the elite and rank-and-file levels of the Hamas group.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction 2. A Brief Political History

of the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict 3. Suicide Operations as the

Convergence of Expressive and Instrumental Violence with

Multiple Rationalities 4. Identity, Power and the Palestinian

Norm of Militant Heroic Martyrdom 5. Jihad, Political Islam

and the Duality of Suicide Bombings 6. Conclusion.


February 2011: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-49804-3: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Corporate Security, Terrorism

and Risk

Karen Lund Petersen, University of Copenhagen,


Series: Routledge Advances in International Relations

and Global Politics

Situated within the debate on terrorism risk and security,

this book investigates the role of private companies in

counter-terrorism policies. With case studies on airports,

airlines, ports and food production companies it

challenges the modern understandings of national

security and corporate risk.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: The Politics of Corporate

Security 2. Risk and Security Knowledge 3. Concepts and

Change 4. National Security: The Danish Political Debates on

Counterterrorism 5. Corporate Risk: The Corporate Debates

on Terrorism 6. The Wider Perspective: The American Political

and Corporate Debates on Counterterrorism 7. Conclusions

March 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57999-5: £70.00

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Ending Terrorism

Lessons for Defeating al-Qaeda

Audrey Kurth Cronin, Oxford University, UK

Series: Adelphi series

This title explains five typical

strategies of terrorism and

why Western thinkers fail to

grasp them. It then describes

historical patterns in ending

terrorism to suggest how

insights from that history

can lay a foundation for more

effective counter-strategies.

Finally, it extracts policy

prescriptions specifically

relevant to ending the

campaign of al-Qaeda and

its associates, moving towards a post-al-Qaeda world.

2008: 234 x 156: 86pp

Pb: 978-0-415-45062-1: £16.99

For more information, visit:




The Global Politics of Cooperation and


Peter Romaniuk, City University of New York, USA

Series: Global Institutions

Contemporary terrorism is a

global phenomenon requiring

a globalized response. In this

book Peter Romaniuk aims to

assess to what extent states seek

multilateral responses to the

threats they face from terrorists.

Providing a concise history and

a clear discussion of current

patterns of counter-terrorist

co-operation, this book:

• analyses a wide spectrum of


• explains the full range of cooperative counter-terrorist

activities and the patterns across them

• examines under what conditions states cooperate to

suppress terrorism

• evaluates how existing international institutions have

been affected by the US-led ’global war on terror,’

launched after the 9/11 terrorist attacks.

Selected Contents: 1. Historical Precedents for Multilateral

Counter-Terrorism: Anti-Anarchist Cooperation and the

League of Nations 2. Multilateral Counter-Terrorism and the

United Nations, 1945-2001 3. Multilateral Counter-Terrorism

and the United Nations after 9/11 4. Multilateral

Counter-Terrorism beyond the UN 5. Multilateral

Counter-Terrorism: Today and Tomorrow

March 2010: 216 x 138: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77647-9: £70.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77648-6: £17.99

eBook: 978-0-203-85741-0

For more information, visit:


Routledge Critical Terrorism Studies

Series Edited by Richard Jackson, Marie

Breen Smyth and Jeroen Gunning, all

at Aberystwyth University, UK

This book series publishes rigorous and

innovative studies on all aspects of terrorism,

counter-terrorism and state terror. It seeks to

advance a new generation of thinking on

traditional subjects, investigate topics

frequently overlooked in orthodox accounts

of terrorism and to apply knowledge from

disciplines beyond International Relations

and Security Studies.

Forthcoming in 2011

The Making of Terrorism

in Pakistan

Historical and Social Roots of Extremism

Eamon Murphy, Curtin University of Technology,


This book aims to explain the rise of Pakistan as a centre

of Islamic extremism by examining the social, political and

economic factors alongside the nature of Islam in Pakistan

that have contributed to the rise of terrorism in Pakistan.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Islam, the Formation of

Pakistan, and the First Military Dictatorship, 1947-69

1. A Clash of Civilizations? Islam in Pakistan 2. A Dream of

a Secular, Inclusive, Democratic State Lost: Mohammed Ali

Jinnah and the Formation of Pakistan 3. Class, Ethnicity and

the Establishment of the New State 4. Enduring Conflict: The

Kashmir Conflict and Ongoing Wars with India Part 2: On

the Path to Islamization, 1969-98 5. Disaster: The Break-up

of Pakistan and the Treat to the Sate’s Survival 6. A Lost

Opportunity: The Failure of Democracy under Zulfikar Ali

Bhutto 7. On the Path to Global Terrorism: Islamization under

General Zia ul-Haq 8. A Crucible for Terrorism: Afghanistan

jihad and the Roles of the US and Saudi Arabia 9. Saudi

Arabia and the Spread of Wahhabi Islam in Pakistan

10. Saviour or Failure? General Pervez Musharraf and the War

on Terrorism 11. The Acid Test: 9/11 and the War on Terrorism

Part 3: Pakistan Jihad and the Emergence of Global

Terrorism, 1998-2009 12. A Turning Point? Descent into

Chaos or the Restoration of Democracy and the Defeat of

Terrorism. Conclusion: The Making of Terrorism

May 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56526-4: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86169-1

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

TerrorisM sTudies 49

Forthcoming in 2011

Counter-Terrorism and State

Political Violence

The ’War on Terror’ as Terror

Edited by Scott Poynting, Manchester Metropolitan

University, UK and David Whyte

This edited volume aims to deepen our understanding of

state power through a series of case studies of political

violence arising from state ‘counter-terrorism’ strategies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: From Political Violence to

State Terrorism Scott Poynting and David Whyte Part 1: State

Political Violence and Counter-Terrorism in the UK

2. Pursue and Prevent: The British State’s ‘Counter-terror’

as Counterinsurgency David Miller and Rizwaan Sabir

3. Immigration Laws and the State Terror Framework Hicham

Yezza 4. The Terror of Expulsion Jonny Burnett 5. Operation

Kratos, the de Menezes Killing, and ‘Due Process’ Graham

Smith 6. British Counter-Insurgency practice in the North of

Ireland in the 1970s? A Legitimate Response or State Terror?

Paul O’Connor, Alan Brecknell and Maggie O’Conor Part 2:

State Political Violence and Counter-Terrorism Across the

World 7. Masters of Terror Noam Chomsky 8. The Great

Game John Pilger 9. Terrorising Tamil Ealam Vicki Sentas

10. Israeli State Terrorism against Palestinians in Gaza 2008-9

Victoria Mason 11. Untouchable Compradores? Colombian

State Narco-Terrorism and the People’s Struggle for National

Liberation Oliver Villar 12. The Criminalisation of Anti-Colonial

Struggle in Puerto Rico Jose Atiles-Osoria 13. ‘War on Terror’

and Spanish State Violence against Basque Political Dissent

Stefanie Khoury and Pablo Ciocchini 14. Indonesian State

Terrorism in Timor-Leste and West Papua Elizabeth Stanley

15. State Terrorism in the Sahara: The US and European

Dimensions Jeremy Keenan

July 2011: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-60720-9: £75.00

For more information, visit:



An Intellectual History of Terror

War, Violence and the State

Mikkel Thorup, Aarhus University, Denmark

This book investigates terrorism and anti-terrorism as

related and interacting phenomena, undertaking a

simultaneous reading of terrorist and statist ideologists

in order to reconstruct the ‘deadly dialogue’ between


Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: To Terrorize and to

Theorize Part 1: Investigative Signposts 2. Killing Words:

On Justifying Violence 3. The Violently Privileged: On the State

4. Beyond the Line: On Frontierlands Part 2: Archive of

Terrors 5. Terror as Fright: The Concept of Terror before the

French Revolution 6. Terror as Policy: The Concept of Terror

during the French Revolution 7. Terror as Crime: The Concept

of Terror after the French Revolution Part 3: Pirates and

Terrorists 8. Pirates and Barbarians: The Barbary ‘Axis of Piracy’

and Western ‘Anti-Terror’-Campaigns 9. Enemy of Humanity:

the Anti-Piracy Discourse in Present Day Anti-Terrorism

10. State Pirates: Warriors in the Maritime Frontierland

Part 4: States of Terror, States of Humanity 11. All Talk and

No Security: The Securitist Critique of the Liberal Democracy’s

Irresponsibility 12. The Humanitarian Sovereign: Cosmopolitan

Warfare in the New Global Frontierland

May 2010: 234 x 156: 296pp

Hb: 978-0-415-57995-7: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-84821-0

For more information, visit:



TerrorisM sTudies

Discourses and Practices

of Terrorism

Interrogating Terror

Edited by Bob Brecher and Mark Devenney, both

at University of Brighton, UK and Aaron Winter,

University of Abertay Dundee, UK

This interdisciplinary book investigates the

consequences of the language of terror for our

lives in democratic societies.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Philosophy, Politics,

Terror Bob Brecher and Mark Devenney 2. Rediscovering the

Individual in the ’War on Terror’: A Virtue and Liberal Approach

Heather Widdows 3. Is there a Justifiable Shoot-to-Kill Policy?

Shahrar Ali 4. Torture and the Demise of the Justiciable

Standard of Enlightened Government: A S Perspective Don

Wallace and Akis Kalaitzidis 5. Asylum and the Discourse of

Terror: The European ’Security state’ Fran Cetti 6. Feeling

Persecuted? The Definitive Role of Paranoid Anxiety in the

Constitution of ’War on Terror’ Television Hugh Ortega Breton

7. Fundamentalist Foundations of Terrorist Practice: The Political

Logic of Life-Sacrifice Jeff Noonan 8. Specificities,

Complexities, Histories: Algerian Politics and George Bush’s

USA-led ’War on Terror’ Martin Evans 9. Ignatieff, Ireland and

the Lesser Evil: Some Problems with the Lessons Learnt Mark

McGovern 10. American Terror: From Oklahoma City to 9/11

and After Aaron Winter. Bibliography

February 2010: 234 x 156: 208pp

Hb: 978-0-415-48808-2: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-85734-2

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Reconciliation after Terrorism

Strategy, Possibility or Absurdity?

Edited by Alexander Spencer and Judith Renner,

both at Ludwig-Maximilians-University Munich,


Series: Routledge Studies in Peace and Conflict


This book brings together scholars from the hitherto

disparate fields of terrorism and reconciliation studies to

examine whether reconciliation is a possible strategy for

dealing with and ending a terrorist conflict.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Reconciling the

Seemingly Irreconcilable? Judith Renner and Alexander

Spencer Part 1: Theory and Methodology 1. A

Reconciliation Perspective: Dealing with a Terrorist Past

Michael Humphrey 2. A Terrorism Perspective: Actor

Transformation of the ‘Terrorist’: Shades of Legitimacy

3. Talking to Terrorists: Problems of Methodology and Risks

of Field Research Carolin Görzig Part 2: Empirical Case

Studies 4. Reconciliation without the Other: Germany and

RAF Terrorism Christopher Daase 5. Reconciliation and the

Failure of Terrorism in South Tyrol Günther Pallaver

6. Reconciliation and Paramilitaries in Northern Ireland Marie

Breen Smyth 7. From Franco to ETA: Reconciliation after

State and Sub-State Terror in Spain Andrew Rigby 8. From

‘Terrorist’ to Politicians: The ANC and Reconciliation in South

Africa David J. Whittaker 9. Overcoming Terrorism without

Reconciliation in Peru David Scott Palmer 10. Reconciliation

with FARC in Colombia Juan Munévar and Frédéric Massé

11. Terror, Empathy and Reconciliation In the Israeli-

Palestinian Conflict Yehudith Auerbach and Ifat Maoz.

Conclusion: From Isolation, via Negotiation to

Reconciliation? Judith Renner and Alexander Spencer

March 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-58858-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011


Debating Terrorism

Interdisciplinary Analyses of Key Issues

Edited by Richard Jackson and Samuel J. Sinclair

Debating Terrorism is an innovative new textbook,

addressing a number of key issues in contemporary

terrorism studies from both ’traditional’ and ’critical’


This volume aims to bring together in one place many

of the field’s leading scholars to debate the key issues

relating a set of 12 important controversies and questions.

The format of the volume involves a leading scholar taking

a particular position on the controversy, followed by an

opposing or alternative viewpoint written by another

scholar. In addition to the pedagogic value of allowing

students to read opposing arguments in one place, the

volume will also be important for providing an overview

of the state of the field and its key lines of debate.

This textbook will be essential reading for all students of

terrorism and political violence, critical terrorism studies,

critical security studies, security studies and IR in general.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Definition of Terrorism

1. Is Terrorism Still a Useful Analytical Term or Should it be

Abandoned? 2. Is there a ‘New Terrorism’ in Existence

Today? 3. Can States be Terrorists? 4. Is Terrorism a Serious

Threat to International and National Security? 5. Is WMD

Terrorism a Likely Prospect in the Future? 6. Does al Qaeda

Continue to Pose a Serious International Threat? 7. Are

People Biologically, Genetically or Neurologically Predisposed

to Violent, Terrorist Behaviour? 8. Is Religious Extremism

a Major Cause of Terrorism? 9. Are Current Frameworks

Effective in Responding to Terrorism? 10. Is the Torture of

Terrorist Suspects Justified? 11. Is the Targeted Assassination

of Terrorist Suspects a Legitimate and Effective Response to

Terrorism? 12. Has the Global War on Terrorism been an

Effective Response to 9/11? Further Readings. Index

June 2011: 246 x 174: 272pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59115-7: £90.00

Pb: 978-0-415-59116-4: £24.99

For more information, visit:



Counterterrorism Policies

in Central Asia

Mariya Y. Omelicheva, University of Kansas, USA

Series: Central Asian Studies

This book examines the dangerous tendency of

counterterrorism policies of the Central Asian states to

grow more alike amid propensities for divergence and

attributes this trend to the impact of the social context

in which these states operate.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. A Reference Group

Perspective on State Behaviour 2. Kyrgyzstan’s Counterterrorism

Policy 3. Kazakhstan’s Counterterrorism Policy 4. Conclusion

August 2010: 234 x 156: 192pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77981-4: £80.00

For more information, visit:


sTraTegiC sTudies



Forthcoming in 2011

Routledge Handbook of

Insurgency and Counter-


Edited by Paul B. Rich and Isabelle Duyvesteyn,

University of Utrecht, the Netherlands

This new handbook offers a wide-ranging examination

of the current state of academic analysis and debate as

well as an up-to-date survey of contemporary insurgent

movements and counter-insurgencies.

Selected Contents: Introduction: The Study of Insurgency

and Counter-Insurgency Paul Rich and Isabelle Duyvesteyn

Part 1: Theoretical and Analytical Issues 1. The

Historiography of Insurgency Ian Beckett 2. The Sociological

and Psychological Study of Insurgency and Counter-Insurgency

Jeffrey Sluka 3. Rethinking the Nature of Insurgency Steven

Metz 4. Changing Forms of Insurgency: Pirates and

Narco-Gangs? Robert Bunker 5. Insurgency, Counter-

Insurgency and Policing Alice Hills 6. Insurgency and

Cyber-War David Betz 7. Ethical Dimensions to Insurgency

and Counter-Insurgency Christopher Coker Part 2: Insurgent

Movements 8. Insurgent Movements in Latin America Daniel

Castro 9. Insurgent Movements in Africa William Reno

10. Insurgent Movements in Iraq Ahmed Hashim 11. The

Insurgency of Hamas and Hizballah 12. Insurgent Movements

in South East Asia Larry Cline 13. Insurgent Movements in

Pakistan Christine Fair 14. Insurgency in Afghanistan Antonio

Giustozzi 15. Insurgent Movements in India Navnita Chadha

Behera 16. Insurgent Movements in Russia John Russell

Part 3: Counterinsurgency 17. The Debate on Counter-

Insurgency William Rosenau 18. The Technology and Logistics

of Modern Counter-Insurgency Kevin O’Brien 19. Trends in US

Counter-Insurgency Tom Mockaitis 20. Counter-Insurgency in

Iraq and Afghanistan: A Strategic Watershed? John Nagl

21. On Israeli Counter-Insurgent Doctrines and Practice Sergio

Catignani 22. A ’Successful’ Model of Counter-Insurgency?

The Sri Lankan Government’s War against the LTTE 23. British

Counter-Insurgency since Ulster Warren Chin 24. Counter-

Insurgency in a Non-democratic State: The Russian Example

Yuri Zhukov 25. Counter-Insurgency in South America Mark T.

Berger 26. Counter-Insurgency in India Sumit Ganguly and

David Fidler 27. Counter-Insurgency in Pakistan Julian Schofield

28. Counter-Insurgency in China Martin I. Wayne

29. Counter-Insurgency in South East Asia Tom Marks

Part 4: Insurgency and Counter-Insurgency in a

Globalising World 30. Contemporary Insurgency and

Counter-Insurgency David Kilcullen 31. Emerging Trends

in the Twenty-first Century Paul Rich and Isabelle Duyvesteyn

July 2011: 246 x 174: 400pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56733-6: £110.00

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

The US Military and Outer Space

Perspectives, Plans and Programs

Peter L. Hays, National Defense University,

Washington DC, USA

Series: Space Power and Politics

A new explanation of the evolution of US military

perspectives, plans, and programmes for the use of

space from the 1950s to the present.

July 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-36654-0: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-01924-5

For more information, visit:


Complimentary exam Copy e-inspection New in Paperback Companion Website

Forthcoming in 2011


Modern Strategy

An Introduction

Elinor Sloan, Carleton University, Ottawa, Canada

The aim of this book is to provide a coherent, integrated

introductory textbook on post-Cold War strategic theory

for upper-level students seeking an initial understanding

of strategic studies.

Dramatic changes and developments in the international

security environment over the past decade and a half

have created the need to examine the ideas of more

contemporary strategic thinkers, and to revise the key

textbooks of strategic thought. This book will examine

modern strategic thought, with a focus on the post-Cold

War period. Each chapter will cover a different theme,

and the text will centre on the ideas of key strategic

thinkers within this functional theme, as well as concepts

within the functional theme that are not necessarily

associated with a specific thinker.

In the post-Cold War and especially post-9/11 period

there has been significant and growing interest among

students about international security issues, but while

works have been published that focus on a particular

aspect of military strategy, there is no one volume that

provides a comprehensive yet accessible overview and

examination of strategic thought in the period since the

end of the Cold War. This book aims to fill this key gap

in the literature.

This book will be essential reading for students of

strategic studies, war studies and military history, and

highly recommended for students of security studies

and IR in general.

Selected Contents: Introduction: Strategy and Strategic

Thought 1. Sea Power 2. Land Power 3. Air Power

4. Joint Theory 5. Nuclear Power and Deterrence 6. Space

7. Irregular Warfare & Counterinsurgency 8. Asymmetric

Warfare. Conclusion. Select Bibliography

December 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-77770-4: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-77771-1: £22.99

For more information, visit:



Theory of Space Power

The Perils of Strategic Analogy

John Sheldon, School of Advanced Air Power

Studies, USA

Series: Space Power and Politics

This book will provide a coherent strategic theory for

space power, and explains why previous attempts at

theorizing about space power have failed.

Selected Contents: 1. Introduction: Strategic Analogies

and Space Power 2. The Character of Space Power 3. Space

Power and Sea Power 4. Space Power and Air Power

5. Strategic Analogies and the Foundations of a Theory

of Space Power. Select Bibliography

June 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-47715-4: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Geopolitical Theory

Forthcoming in 2011

Geopolitics and Strategic

History 1871–2050

Geoffrey Sloan, University of Reading, UK

This work explains the course of international politics

from the rebirth of the German Empire to the rise of

China, with particular, though not exclusive, reference

to spatial relationships.

June 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-7146-5348-8: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-48948-2

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Inventing Geopolitics

Venier Pascal, University of Salford, UK

This book provides a long overdue reconsideration of

Mackinder’s contribution to the history of strategy.

April 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-36932-9: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-02954-1

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011

Grand Strategy and the


Foreign Policy, War and the American

Role in the World

C. Dale Walton, University of Reading, UK

Series: Strategy and History

This book examines the role of the Presidency in the

formulation and conduct of US grand strategy and why

this is important.

Selected Contents: Introduction 1. The American Rise

to Preeminence 2. Cold War Triumph and its Aftermath

3. Power without Strategic Clarity 4. The Importance of

Presidential Greatness 5. Why Most Future US Presidents

will be Inadequate Foreign Policy Strategists and War Leaders

6. The Tragedy of Presidential Weakness. Conclusion.


February 2011: 234 x 156: 224pp

Hb: 978-0-415-59832-3: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Browse and order online: www.routledge.com/securitystudies

sTraTegiC sTudies 51

Series edited by Geoffrey Sloan, Britannia Royal Naval College, Dartmouth, UK and

Leonard Hochberg, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, USA

This new series facilitates an understanding of global politics that is grounded in

geopolitical realities. It outlines the strategic options that policy makers face in a number

of geographical regions by revisiting the classical geopolitical theories of the twentieth

century, and publishing new work on geopolitical theory.

Forthcoming in 2011

Geopolitics for

the 21st Century

Addressing National Insecurities

Edited by Leonard Hochberg and

James D. Hardy Jr., both at Louisiana State

University, USA

This edited volume assesses the geopolitical

configuration of forces in the international arena

at the beginning of the twenty-first century.

Selected Contents: Introduction Leonard Hochberg and

James D. Hardy, Jr. 1. The Enduring Significance of Classical

Geopolitical Thought Leonard Hochberg, James D. Hardy, Jr.

and Geoff Sloan 2. Geopolitics and Strategic Cultures: A

Comparison of the Arab, Chinese, and Western Ways of War

Laurent Murawiec 3. The Geopolitics of Terror: How Home

Grown Jihadists are Recruited in the West Steven Emerson

4. The Geopolitics of Strategic Goods Ewan Anderson

5. Classical Geopolitics in the Space Age: The Strategy of

Transformation Everett Carl Dolman 6. Toward a Second Cold

War Era? 2000-2025: A Geopolitical Net Assessment of Current

Trajectories and Future Developments Ioannis Loucas. Conclusion

May 2011: 234 x 156: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-43392-1: £75.00

For more information, visit:


Great Powers and Strategic

Stability in the 21st Century

Competing Visions of World Order

Edited by Graeme P. Herd, Geneva Centre for

Security Policy, Switzerland

Series: Routledge Global Security Studies

This book addresses the issue of grand strategic stability

in the twenty-first century.

Selected Contents: Part 1: Introduction 1. International

Security, Great Powers and World Order Graeme P. Herd and

Pàl Dunay Part 2: Strategic Threats: Nature and Evolution

2. Terrorism and Political Extremism Ekaterina Stepanova

3. Proliferation of Weapons of Mass Destruction Gustav

Lindstrom 4. Regional Crisis, Conflict and Fragile States Caty

Clément 5. How Energy and Climate Change May Pose a

Threat to Sustainable Security Tapani Vaahtoranta Part 3:

Centres of Global Power: Strategic Priorities and Threat

Management 6. The United States: Leadership Beyond

Unipolarity? Matthew Rhodes 7. The Russian Federation:

Striving for Multi-Polarity but Missing the Consequences Pavel

K. Baev 8. China as an Emergent Center of Global Power

Bates Gill 9. India’s Eclectic Approach to Global Strategic

Threats Siddharth Varadarajan 10. The European Union,

Facing Non Traditional Threats in a Globalized World Thierry

Tardy Part 4: Conclusions: Cooperation and Conflictual

Imperatives 11. Great Powers, Strategic Threats and

Uncharted Waters Graeme P. Herd

February 2010: 234 x 156: 256pp

Hb: 978-0-415-56054-2: £75.00

eBook: 978-0-203-86582-8

For more information, visit:



sTraTegiC sTudies

The Evolution of Strategic


Classic Adelphi Papers

Edited by The International Institute

for Strategic Studies

Series: Adelphi series

This volume provides an

understanding of the evolution

of strategic thinking since the

Adelphi Papers began during

the Cold War. These papers are

important both in terms of the

intellectual contribution they

made at the time, and their

enduring value in shedding

light even on today’s security


Selected Contents: Introduction

Patrick M. Cronin 1. Evolution of

NATO Alastair Buchan (Adelphi Paper 1, 1961) 2. Controlled

Response and Strategic Warfare T.C. Schelling (Adelphi Paper

19, 1965) 3. The Control of Proliferation: Three Views Solly

Zuckerman, Alva Myrdal and Lester B. Pearson (Adelphi Paper

29, 1966) 4. Israel and the Arab World: The Crisis of 1967

Michael Howard and Robert Hunter (Adelphi Paper 41, 1967)

5. The Asian Balance of Power: A Comparison with European

Precedents Coral Bell (Adelphi Paper 44, 1968) 6. Change and

Security in Europe Pierre Hassner (Adelphi Paper 49, 1968)

7. Urban Guerrilla Warfare Robert Moss (Adelphi Paper 79,

1971) 8. Oil and Influence: The Oil Weapon Examined Hanns

Maull (Adelphi Paper 117, 1975) 9. The Spread of Nuclear

Weapons: More May Be Better Kenneth N. Waltz (Adelphi

Paper 171, 1981) 10. Intervention and Regional Security Neil

Macfarlane (Adelphi Paper 196, 1985) 11. Humanitarian

Action in War Adam Roberts (Adelphi Paper 305, 1996)

12. The Transformation of Strategic Affairs Lawrence

Freedman (Adelphi Paper 379, 2006)

2008: 234 x 156: 704pp

Hb: 978-0-415-45961-7: £105.00

eBook: 978-0-203-92831-8

For more information, visit:


Forthcoming in 2011


Understanding Contemporary


Thomas M. Kane and David J. Lonsdale, both at

University of Hull, UK

This new co-authored textbook explains and describes

the key intellectual debates around military strategy in

the early twenty-first century. The book emphasizes the

connections between military operations and broader

issues of national policy, and focuses on how current

issues such as terrorism, insurgency, nuclear proliferation,

information technology and American superiority in

conventional military power challenge – and reaffirm –

assumptions about modern warfare established during

the global conflicts of the twentieth century.

Selected Contents: 1. What is Strategy? An Introduction

2. Twentieth Century Land Warfare 3. Emerging Military

Technology: Evolution or Revolution? 4. Insurgency 5. Once

and Future Terrorism 6. Nuclear Weapons in the Twenty-First

Century 7. War at Sea 8. Strategic Air Warfare 9. War in

Space 10. The Intelligence Services 11. Why People Fight

12. Grand Strategy in the Twenty-First Century 13. Conclusion.

Select Bibliography

April 2011: 246 x 174: 240pp

Hb: 978-0-415-46166-5: £85.00

Pb: 978-0-415-46167-2: £22.99

For more information, visit:


iNTelligeNCe sTudies



Handbook of Intelligence


Edited by Loch K. Johnson

This volume offers a comprehensive review of secret

intelligence organizations and activities.

Leading experts in the field

approach the three major

missions of intelligence:

collection-and-analysis; covert

action; and counterintelligence.

Within each of these missions,

the dynamically written essays

dissect the so-called intelligence

cycle to reveal the challenges

of gathering and assessing

information from around

the world.